JP2021186194A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the interest for a game.SOLUTION: In a winning of a special combination, when stop switches 42-44 are operated in a first operation mode, a thirty-third small combination is formed and processing more likely to win a transition lottery to an AT mode is executed, whilst when the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a second operation mode, a first small combination to a sixth small combination are formed and processing more unlikely to win the transition lottery to the AT mode is executed. An operation order by which the first small combination to the sixth small combination winning are formed in a push order bell winning is included in the second operation mode. When the special combination is won in the AT mode, a notification of the operation order by which the first small combination to the sixth small combination winning are formed is given.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
A start operation means for performing a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a start operation means.
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a stop operation means.
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. The drive control means to be executed and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result can be established, while the stop operation means is different from the first operation order. When the operations are performed in the two operation order, the order result is set so that the prize of the second result can be established, in which the privilege given by the privilege giving means is smaller than that of the first result.
An advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that causes an advantageous event advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means is provided.
The advantageous determination means includes a transition determination means for executing a transition determination to the advantageous state, with the transition of the gaming state from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event.
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result. By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win a prize for the second result or a result corresponding to the second result, which is different from the first order result among the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result, while the stop operation means is described. By operating in the first operation order, it is set so that the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be won.
A sequence notification means for executing order notification regarding the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means is provided.
In the order notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. While controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, if it is the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed. If it is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the third result can be established, and the first advantage determination is executed as the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the fourth result has more benefits given by the privilege granting means than the third result. The second advantageous determination is executed or the advantageous determination is less likely to result in an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than the first advantageous determination as the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means. A special result is set that does not execute the judgment,
At least the operation of the stop operation means according to the first operation order is included in the second operation mode.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the specific order notification means capable of executing the order notification corresponding to the first operation order by the predetermined notification means is provided. And.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a winning mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 2 bets. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop switch, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation mode at the time of a special combination winning. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of various transition lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. (A) is a flowchart showing the lottery result command setting process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the lottery result command and the push order notification command. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery at the time of stop. It is a figure which shows an example of a ceiling subtraction value table and a stop transition lottery table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the momentum of AT winning and CZ winning. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the precursor game number. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection rate of the continuation rate of AT mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the number of CZ games. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the number of AT games. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ effect setting process at the time of stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a timing chart for explaining the occurrence timing of the production of each game in the CZ mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the execution timing of the CZ effect setting process at the time of stop, and the occurrence rate of the explosion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor effect setting process at the time of stop. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference between the number of games on a display and an actual ceiling reaching game. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of the 1st stop ON in the modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery at the start in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT addition. It is a figure for demonstrating how AT winning notification is performed in a special role winning game. In the third modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a first stop ON time effect setting process, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining how a definite effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the process for AT lottery at the start in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the advance determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a navigation mode in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the specific notification effect. In the modification 6, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the processing for the number of AT games, and (b) is a flowchart showing the processing for adding AT at the time of stop. It is a figure which shows an example of each additional lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the process for addition lottery at the start AT. It is a flowchart which shows the addition pre-determination process. (A) is a flowchart showing a part of the start effect setting process, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining the outline of the specific notification effect during AT. In the modified example 7, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result correspondence process, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a notification small winning combination lottery table. In the modified example 8, (a) is a flowchart showing an advantageous section transition lottery, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification small winning combination lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of the notification small combination lottery in the modification 9. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 10. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of advantageous section transition. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the operation mode and an advantage at the time of winning a special combination in a normal section. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each special combination in the modification eleventh. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the push order notification effect at the time of winning a push order bell, and the push order notification effect at the time of winning a special role. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the lottery result correspondence processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the process which concerns on the instruction function of each special combination in the modification 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by driving a nail to a so-called island facility at the time of installation in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side portion when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by the rotation of the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is in a locked state that cannot be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured to release the locked state by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 sets the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output an exciting pulse of 25 pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are designed so that the main control device 101 can be visually recognized from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the first of the left reel 32L), a "replay" symbol (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L), and a "red 7" symbol (for example, the 14th of the left reel 32L). "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "white 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), "Akakai" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Shirakai" symbol (for example, left) There are 10 types of reel 32L (19th). And, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that out of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels, 3 symbols can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R among the symbols that can be visually recognized. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops on the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of each symbol that stops at the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated by a medal bet and a line that is not activated are set and the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the valid line, As a winning result, a privilege that a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, are paid out is given, and a privilege that the game state is changed is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize is not established and the above privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, among the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, there are cases where three medals are bet and the game is started, and cases where two medals are bet and the game is started, and these three or two medals are started. When a medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. Further, in the following, a game in which three medals are bet and started is a three-bet game, a game in which two medals are bet and started is a two-bet game, and one medal is bet and started. The game is also called a one-bet game. In this embodiment, the 1-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first small winning combination is won. If the first small winning combination is successful, eight medals are paid out in the three-bet game, and five medals are paid out in the two-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the symbols corresponding to the first small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second small winning combination is won. If the second small winning combination is successful, eight medals are paid out in the three-bet game and five medals are paid out in the two-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the symbols corresponding to the second small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above first small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the third small It will be a winning role. If the third small winning combination is successful, eight medals are paid out in the three-bet game, and five medals are paid out in the two-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination are awarded. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fourth small winning combination is awarded. If the 4th small winning combination is successful, 8 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11D, when the symbol corresponding to the 4th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the “bell” symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-up line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 3rd small winning combination winnings. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth small winning combination is awarded. If the fifth small winning combination is successful, eight medals are paid out in the three-bet game, and five medals are paid out in the two-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the fifth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the lines where the "bell" symbols are aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 4th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the sixth small winning combination is awarded. If the 6th small winning combination is successful, 8 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 5 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "bell" symbol is placed on the lower row of the left reel 32L, the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row of the right reel 32R, respectively. Stops (stops in a small mountain shape). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and due to the difference in the stop position of the "bell" symbol, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to 5th small winning combination winning. It is also possible to understand that a small winning combination different from that is established.

"Bell" design on the left reel 32L, "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "Akakai" design or "youth" design on the middle reel 32M, and "white 7" design, "white shell" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML, the 7th small winning combination will be won. If the 7th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

If the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the 8th small winning combination is awarded. If the 8th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 3 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the symbols corresponding to the 8th small winning combination are stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination is different from the above 7th small winning combination due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that is established.

The 9th to 32nd small roles are so-called missing roles, in which a prize is established when the 1st to 6th small roles are missed. When the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small roles are the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Akakai" symbol, "white clam" symbol, "youth" symbol or "bell" on the left reel 32L. "White 7" design, "Cherry" design, "Akakai" design, "Youth" design, "Red 7" design, "Watermelon" design, "Replay" design, "BAR" design, "BAR" design "Bell" or "white clam" design and right reel 32R "red 7" design, "white 7" design, "white shell" design, "youth" design, "water clam" design, "red shell" design, "BAR" The winning is established when the corresponding combination of the symbol or the "replay" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, all of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the 9th small winning combination prize to the 32nd small winning combination winning stop with the "bell" symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no small winning combination, and it is easy to understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

If the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the 33rd small winning combination is awarded. If the 33rd small winning combination is successful, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12 (f), when the symbol corresponding to the 33rd small winning combination is stopped on the effective line ML, the "BAR" symbols may be aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. ..

Incidentally, in the configuration in which medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned first small winning combination prize to 33rd small winning combination winning, the paid out small winning combination is a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as a payout rate, and the ratio of the number of payout medals (payouts) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as a payout rate. In some cases.

The prizes to which the privilege (game value) of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be played without inserting a medal are given include the first re-game prize to the twelfth re-game prize. As shown in FIG. 10, a winning symbol combination is set for each of the first re-game to the twelfth re-game.

The first replay is the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol or "youth" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol and the symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning are stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay prize corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the second replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 13 (e), the "white 7" symbol is aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "white 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel is displayed. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle of 32R.

The fourth re-game and the fifth re-game are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games are won in duplicate.

The sixth replay is the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "cherry" on the right reel 32R. A prize is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 6th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The 7th replay consists of the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. Alternatively, a prize is established when the "Akakai" symbol and the "Akakai" symbol stop on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R, while the middle. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop at the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called upper watermelon tempai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the 7th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-down watermelon tempai is stopped.

The eighth replay is the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. And, the prize is established when it stops on the effective line ML. As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "watermelon" symbol is aligned and stopped on the middle line L2.

In the ninth replay, when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML. The prize is established. As shown in FIG. 13 (b), when the symbol corresponding to the 9th replay winning is stopped on the effective line ML, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called middle stage replay tempai is stopped.

In the 10th replay, the left reel 32L "BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "Akakai" symbol or "youth" symbol, and the right reel 32R The prize is established when the "Red 7" symbol, "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Shirakai" symbol or "Youth" symbol stop on the effective line ML. In the 12th replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective. A prize is established when the player stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 13 (d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize is stopped on the effective line ML, a "cherry" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. If you have won the 10th re-game or the 12th re-game, if you aim at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R and perform a stop operation, the "cherry" symbol will stop in the upper row in the case of the 10th re-game winning. However, in the case of the 12th re-game prize, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower stage, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize. In the eleventh re-game, the prize is established when the tenth re-game and the twelfth re-game cannot be won, that is, when the omission may occur.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed.

If the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the first BB prize is awarded. When the first BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the first BB state. When the symbol corresponding to the first BB prize is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the "BAR" symbols are aligned on the upward-sloping line L5 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (b). , The "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward-sloping line L5.

If the "Akakai" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the second BB prize is awarded. When the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the second BB state. When the symbol corresponding to the second BB prize is stopped on the effective line ML, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the lower line L3 and stopped, or as shown in FIG. 14 (d). , The "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

The stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

The stop switches 42 to 44 have built-in stop lamps 42b to 44b, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b to 44b partially passes through the operation surface of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b to 44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42 to 44. Then, when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is valid, the lighting of the stop lamps 42b to 44b is controlled, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is invalid, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are turned on. Are controlled to be turned off.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges the medal to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for paying out medals (not shown), and pays out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time. Is provided. The specific number of sheets is set according to the progress of the game. For example, if the specified number of cards in the game is set to 3 and the specific number is set to 3, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, 3 virtual medals are provided on condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number of cards is set to 2 and the specified number of cards is set to 2, two cards are inserted on condition that there are credits. When the virtual medal is inserted and the specified number is set to 3 or 2, and the specific number is set to 3, the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. The first is when three virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there is a credit, the specified number is set as three or two, and the specific number is set as two. When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on condition that there are credits. Further, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 merely involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. The slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch because one virtual medal is inserted.

The operation surface of the first credit insertion switch 56 is set to be larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is larger than that of the second credit insertion switch 57. Better than. Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit input switch 56 to proceed with the game. That is, normally, it is considered that the game is played by throwing in a set specific number of sheets out of the specified number of sheets.

An effect switch 66 operated when an effect is generated is provided on the right side of the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order display that informs the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with a section display for showing an advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be advanced in a situation advantageous to the player by changing the winning rate of the small winning combination. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up and blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

In the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, the model name of the gaming machine is described, and a lower display unit 69 constituting a predetermined display screen is provided. There is. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display unit, the lower display unit 69 may be provided with an operation button for effect, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hole manager or the like to adjust the medal output. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that comprehensively manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a combination ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the gaming state advantageous to the player and the non-advantageous state. The role ratio monitor 77 is a main control device so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12, and cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. The 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the role ratio monitor 77 can be visually recognized via the board box in which the main control device 101 is housed. It is contained. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 is invisible even from the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is opened, it is impossible to check the role ratio monitor 77. The combination monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the settlement switch 59. Settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of, reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on, etc. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via the input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than, for example, 10 volt. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a combination monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are included. It is connected via the output port 104.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including the power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). When the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by the power failure process (see FIG. 17), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to input a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and stop lamps 42b to 44b, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display are connected to the output side. The unit 65 is connected. Then, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that centrally manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) or the like is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Further, all or part of the configurations 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 is configured to have these configurations 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be configured to directly control all or part of the above.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the power failure processing will be outlined.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power has been restored from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the output of the power failure signal is continued, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the input medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer update process is performed in which the values of each counter and timer are subtracted / added. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to the display units 60 to 62, 68, and the segment data display process for displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like is performed. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the start pre-processing, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and if a re-game prize is established in a two-bet game, two medals are automatically inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting the virtual medal of.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, the sensor abnormality confirmation process for confirming whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process is performed. If an error has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the checkout switch 59 has been operated, and if the checkout switch 59 is operated, the medal return process of paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In the slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number of sheets in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified number of sheets in the gaming state other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3" except in the bonus state. In step S205, an affirmative judgment is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the bonus state, if the medal is not bet, or if the bet number is "1" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the process of waiting for the start of step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a control device on the sub side in step S206. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes a process for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. And the auxiliary display unit 65 are controlled.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so that the game is started. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed in step S208. That is, only the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211 and the medal payout process of step S212 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is successful is selected. The slot machine 10 has a normal game state and a bonus state as game states, and a lottery table is set for each game state. Then, in the normal game state, since the specified number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state is the lottery table in the 3-bet game. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and one of the bonus status flags is not set, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. .. Then, when the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select a lottery table for normal game states (FIG. 21). Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the processing related to the setting of the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process of the RAM 106. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated once, "setting 1" → "setting 2". → Update the setting values so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is also updated each time the set value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off is regarded as the operation for confirming the set value, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the setting process of the winning probability is completed. do. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a 3-bet game. Further, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for a normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state in a two-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether or not the combination is appropriate is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The determination value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate. In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV affirmed in step S305 to the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the 7th small winning combination winning flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set in step S306. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, in step S306. Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the winning combination other than the 1st BB and the 2nd BB is set. If you have not won, the corresponding winning flag will not be set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, for example, the first BB winning flag is not set. Further, in the state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, and the 10th small winning combination are carried over. Set the winning combination flag and the 13th small winning combination flag.

In addition, a lottery table in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB and the second BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 20, that is, when the game is played in the 3-bet game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning the normal lip A (when IV = 1). The probability of winning is about 1 in 27.3 in setting 1, about 1 in 27.5 in setting 3, and about 1 in 28.3 in setting 6, and the set values are The higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning the normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning the normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value. It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 4) is about 1/164 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV = 5). The probability of winning is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. It is set so that the chance eye B is easier to win than the chance eye C, and the chance eye A is easier to win than the chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is about 1/107 in setting 1, about 1/104 in setting 3, and about 93.6 in setting 6. It is a fraction, and it is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (probability of winning when IV = 8) is about 1/215 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 9). (Probability of becoming) is about 1/13100 regardless of the set value, and is set so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. .. The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle forward push bell 1, middle forward push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the pinch bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value. Regardless of this, each is about 1 / 18.4, and the probability of winning the push order bell is about 1 / 1.56. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the first BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/6.22 regardless of the set value, and other roles (replay, small role, IV = 1 to 1). It is set higher than the winning probability of 24). In the 3-bet game, it is set not to win the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) or the second BB (IV = 26) (0 is set in the corresponding point value PV).

In addition, when a game is played in a 3-bet game in a normal game state, a special role (IV = 27) is set so that any of the 1st to 6th small roles and the 33rd small role can be won. There is. The probability of winning a special role (probability of winning when IV = 27) is about 1/20 regardless of the set value. The special role will be described in detail later.

In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the first BB is 0. In the situation where the first BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1 / 6.22 (for the first BB) regardless of the set value.

On the other hand, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table shown in FIG. 21, that is, when the game is played in the 2-bet game in the normal gaming state, the normal lip A, the normal lip B, and the normal lip C are used. , Chance A, Chance B, Chance C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C (probability of winning when IV = 1-9) is played in the above 3-bet game. It is the same probability as the probability of the case. The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. It is set to be. The push order bell (IV = 11-22) is set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is about 1 of 257 regardless of the set value, and it is set so that it is harder to win than when playing a game in a 3-bet game. Has been done. In the 2-bet game, it is set so that the duplicate 1-card combination (IV = 24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/181 regardless of the set value. Further, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV = 25) is set not to be won, while the second BB (IV = 26) is set to be won, and the probability is not related to the set value. It is about 1 / 4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any of the roles including the second BB is 0. In the situation where the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the two-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the second BB) regardless of the set value.

After setting the winning flag in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the gaming state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, the lottery result command setting process for setting the lottery result command is executed in step S311. The details of the lottery result command setting process will be described in detail later, but the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, the push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11), and the 1st small winning combination winning flag, the 9th small winning combination winning flag, the 10th small winning combination winning flag, and the 13th small winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the first small combination, the ninth small combination, the tenth small combination, and the thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV = 23) and the 7th small winning combination flag and the 8th small winning combination winning flag are set, the symbol corresponding to the 7th small winning combination winning and the 8th small winning combination winning is set. Set the stop symbol information so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped. Further, in the stop information setting process, the special combination is won (winning when IV = 27), and when the 1st small combination winning flag to the 6th small combination winning flag and the 33rd small combination winning flag are set, the first small combination winning flag is set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st small combination to the 6th small combination and the 33rd small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the slot machine 10, the first BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 3-bet game, and the second BB is set so that the winning can be established only in the 2-bet game. Therefore, even when the first BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the first BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the first BB prize is set). Further, even when the second BB winning flag is set, when the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information for establishing the second BB prize is set. (The stop symbol information for avoiding the second BB prize is set).

In the following step S313, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the small winning combination is given priority, and if the small winning combination cannot be established, the bonus winning is established, and the priority is set. .. If the replay and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the replay prize is prioritized and established.

For example, in the situation where the 1st BB is won (the 1st BB winning flag is set and the 1st BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1st BB winning, the 7th small role winning and When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th small winning combination is set, the priority is set so that the 7th small winning combination and the 8th small winning combination are prioritized over the 1st BB winning. .. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal Lip A is further won, the 2nd BB winning and the 1st replay are performed. , When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd re-game, the 3rd re-game and the 4th re-game prize is set, priority is given so that each re-game prize is prioritized over the 2nd BB prize. Set the ranking.

Here, when the re-game is won, the combination of the winning symbols is set so that one of the winning re-games will always win the prize. In other words, if the re-game is won, the re-game prize will always be established and no omission will occur. Therefore, when the stop symbol information between the re-game and the bonus is set, the re-game prize for any of the set re-games is always established, and the bonus prize is not established.

Further, in the priority setting process of step S313, when the special combination is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st small combination winning to the 6th small combination winning and the 33rd small combination winning is set, the stop symbol information is set. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd small winning combination prize is preferentially established, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination is established. Set the priority so that the small winning combination is prioritized.

After executing the process of step S313, the section display first process is executed in step S314, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the combination monitor 77, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect processing is for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the result of the lottery result corresponding process performed in step S310. It is a process. In the following step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotation in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Therefore, even if the player bets a predetermined number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side is a stop switch 42. By lighting and displaying the stop lamps 42b to 44b built in the to 44, the player and the like are notified that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to know which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the effect of stopping the corresponding reel by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. The stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to be turned off.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when the player wins when IV = 11 to 22, that is, when the push order bell is won (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 that generates a stop command is generated. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of ~ 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle forward push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → When the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, the stop information is set so that the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination is established, and the operation is performed in the order of middle → left → right. In that case, the stop information is set so that the third small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The design arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of four symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is the winning symbol regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Can be stopped on the effective line. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that sections separated by 5 or more symbols are formed, it is necessary for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

A case where the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right will be described as an example. In such a case, as described above, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the 17th small winning combination, the 18th small winning combination, or the 21st small winning combination.

The 17th small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol and a "BAR" symbol. Further, the 18th small role symbol in the left reel 32L is a "Akakai" symbol and a "Shirakai" symbol. The 21st small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol and a "youth" symbol. The 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the distance between the symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, any one of the 17th small winning combination symbol, the 18th small winning combination symbol, and the 21st small winning combination symbol is on the effective line (middle stage) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In the slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing that allows them to be stopped, stop control is performed so that the symbols with a small number of sliding frames are stopped at the effective line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the fourth "ark shell" symbol (2) which is the 18th small winning combination symbol. Komasuberi) and the 5th "replay" symbol (3 frames), which is the 21st small role symbol, can be stopped in the middle row, while the 4th "Akakai" symbol with the smallest number of slip frames is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th small winning combination, the 17th small winning combination and the 21st small winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th small winning combination symbol of the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the 18th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 18th small winning combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, in this case, the stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43.

The 18th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white shell" symbol and a "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged so that the distance between the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol is 5 or more. That is, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th small role symbol "white shell" symbol or "youth" symbol can be stopped in the upper row, and cases where it cannot be stopped in the upper row. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that can be stopped in the upper row, the 18th small winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing that cannot be stopped in the upper row, so-called omission. It becomes.

Here, when the "Akakai" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the upper row of the middle reel 32M, the 18th small is won by winning the middle forward push bell 1 as described above. In addition to the possibility that the winning combination will be established, there is also the possibility that the 20th small winning combination will be established by winning the middle forward push bell 2. That is, as for the 20th small winning combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 18th small winning combination symbol. Then, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small role symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "youth" symbol, while the 20th small role symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol, which are different. ing. In particular, in the right reel 32R, the 18th small winning combination symbol and the 20th small winning combination symbol are the 20th small winning combination symbol when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when the 18th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line. Cannot be stopped at the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 20th small winning combination symbol can be stopped at the effective line, the 18th small winning combination symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Each of these symbols is arranged in. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle forward push bell 1 is won or the middle forward push bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped and the 18th small winning combination is won. And even if it is a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th small winning combination, it is not possible to aim for it and win a prize.

Next, a case where one middle forward push bell is won and each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the order of middle → left → right will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the third small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "replay" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "replay" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "replay" symbol is stopped at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "ark shell" symbol, which are the third small role symbols, are arranged so that the distance between these symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" symbol or the "ark shell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the third small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, the first small winning combination is won regardless of the operation timing. When 2 small winning combination, 3rd small winning combination, 4th small winning combination, 5th small winning combination, or 6th small winning combination is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the same. Depending on the operation timing, another small winning combination may be established, or none of the small winning combination may be established and the prize may be missed. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, the 1st small role prize, the 2nd small role prize, the 3rd small role prize, the 4th small role prize, the 5th small role prize , Or the 6th small winning combination is established.

Next, a case where the left stop switch 42 is operated first among the stop switches 42 to 44 when the special combination is won will be described as an example. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 24, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination winning, the second small winning combination winning, or the 33rd small winning combination winning.

The first small winning combination symbol and the second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L are "replay" symbols. The 33rd small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol. In this case, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol reaches the middle stage, it is the 1st small winning combination symbol or the 2nd small winning combination symbol. The drive control is performed so that the "BAR" symbol, which is the 33rd small winning combination symbol, is stopped in the middle stage instead of the "replay" symbol. Then, the "bell" symbol, which is the 33rd small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M and the 33rd small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R, stops at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43 to 44, and is the second. 33 small winning wins are established.

On the other hand, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated first among the stop switches 42 to 44 after winning the special role, the 0th "replay" symbol to the 4th "Akakai" symbol Or, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 10th "replay" symbol to the 19th "white clam" symbol reaches the middle stage, it is the 1st small winning combination symbol or the 2nd small winning combination symbol. Drive control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle stage. Then, the "replay" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M and the first small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R, stops at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43 to 44, and is in the middle. The second small winning combination symbol on the reel 32M and the "bell" symbol, which is the second small winning combination symbol on the right reel 32R, stop at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43 to 44, so that the first small combination symbol is used. A winning combination or a second small winning combination is established.

In addition, when a special combination is won and a stop switch 42 to 44 other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the third small combination winning to the sixth stop switch 42 to 44 are not affected by the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. A small role prize is established.

That is, when the special role is won, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage as the first operation mode. In that case, the 33rd small winning combination is established and one medal is paid out, and when each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the first Small role winning ~ 6th small role winning is established and 8 medals are paid out.

As described above, in the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination, even if one of the push order bells is won and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the corresponding operation order, the prize is won. To establish. Then, when the special role is won, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, it is possible to clearly grasp that the game was won for the special role. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode when the special role is won, is the first small role winning to the sixth small winning combination established with the special role as an opportunity? Since the operation order at the time of winning the push order bell corresponds to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination, the player cannot judge whether or not the winning has been established from the stop rolls and the number of payouts.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the valid line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not the winning is established on the valid line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the bonus state process is executed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state processing, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S416. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-gaming prize to the twelfth re-game winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes are established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes is established, the re-game setting process is performed so that the game mode is set to the re-game mode. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game mode is the re-game mode, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for paying medals is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether or not these are the first BB state and the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It can be discriminated. That is, in step S501, when neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the first BB state and the second BB state are not set, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not one of the BBs has been won. If none of the BB winning flags are set, the bonus state processing ends as it is. If any of the BB winning flags are set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated while 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of cards in the game, in a situation where two or three cards are set as the specified number of cards in the game, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a two-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any of the BB prizes are not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any of the BB winnings is established, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning is established.

If the first BB prize is established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the upper limit payout number in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. As a result, from the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the following step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the first BB state is started, and the display control device 81 that has received the first BB start command starts the first BB state. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to the above is performed. Further, in the display control device 81, by receiving the first BB start command, it becomes possible to grasp that the first BB state is from the next game, and the speaker 64 and the speaker 64 so that the effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of games in the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in the 3-bet game.

The initial values of the specified bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified bets are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the first BB prize has not been established is the case where the second BB prize has been established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511 and the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter is executed. That is, the second BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, a process of setting the second BB state flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, and the like are controlled so that the effect for the 2BB state is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to the extent that the player can identify them. Further, the appearance and contents of the production for the first BB state and the production for the second BB state are different to the extent that the player can identify them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process ends. That is, not only in the first BB state, but also in the second BB state, the specified number of games is set to three, and the second BB state is performed in the three-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing in the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB state. In the present embodiment, the lottery table common to the first BB state and the second BB state is used, but a separate lottery table is provided for each, and the types of winning combinations and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. You may. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal lip A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a normal Lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about. It is 1/596, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card combination (probability of winning when IV = 24) is about 1/1.31. Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of losing the winning combination is about 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of plus or minus about 0.00), and the number of medals does not increase or decrease in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase in the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1st BB state that can be transferred in the 3-bet game, the main medal increase is the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination in which 13 medals are paid out. In the normal game state, it is a push order bell, and in the first BB state, it is a common bell. Comparing the winning rates of these main small wins, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain operation order in the normal game state, the winning rate is about 1/36. On the other hand, in the first BB state, a prize is won with a probability of about 1/596, and in a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that a prize is more likely to occur than in the normal gaming state. In addition, in the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transferred in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and in the normal game state, the probability is about 1/964. In the 2nd BB state, there is a 1/596 chance of winning a prize, and even in a 2-bet game, the 2nd BB state is more likely to win a prize than the normal game state. It is set.

However, as mentioned above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are digested, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state processing, in step S515, as a result of the lottery processing by the above-mentioned BB state lottery table and each reel control, it is determined whether or not any small winning combination is established in this game. If the winning is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counters of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S516. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter becomes 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if the common bell is won and the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established, 13 cards will be paid out. Therefore, in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that the value is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is 0 or less, in step S518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, if it is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if it is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, the process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed in step S519, and the BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended this time is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S520. More specifically, the first BB end command is output and set when the first BB state is terminated, and the second BB end command is output and set when the second BB state is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the effect for ending the first BB and the effect for ending the second BB are performed.

After that, in step S521, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3, and then the bonus state processing ends. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal gaming state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is played. The game will be played at. That is, in a situation where neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the game is set so that the game can be easily played in the 2-bet game. By the way, after the end of the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, so that 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56 and the 2nd credit insertion switch 57. In order to play the betting game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 27.

The normal gaming state in which the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set and neither BB is won is a state called a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the specified number of bets (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB can be won, but the 2nd BB cannot be won, and in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB can be won, but the 1st BB cannot be won. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, basically, the winning of the second BB may occur in the two-bet game.

If the first BB or the second BB is won and the winning game is not successful, the internal state (carry-over state) is such that the first BB winning or the second BB winning is carried over. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified number of bets (specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game is a 3-bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the first BB is won, the first BB prize can be established in the 3-bet game, while the first BB prize cannot be established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. Further, in the internal state in which the second BB is won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed so that the second BB winning cannot be established in the 3-bet game, while the second BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game. Will be done. That is, if the first BB is won in the 3-bet game, the first BB prize can be established if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, but if the first BB is won and then the 2-bet game is switched to, the first BB prize is won. Cannot be established. In addition, if the 2nd BB is won in the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB winning can be established if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, but if the 2nd BB is won and then the 3-bet game is switched to, the 2nd BB winning is achieved. Cannot be established. Then, the first BB and the second BB are not won in duplicate, and in a situation where the first BB is carried over, the first BB is not won again, and the second BB is not won in duplicate. In addition, in the situation where the second BB winning is carried over, the second BB will not be won again, and the first BB will not be won in duplicate. That is, if the game is played in the 2-bet game when the 1st BB is won, the game in the internal state where the 1st BB winning is carried over continues endlessly, and when the 2nd BB is won, the game is played in the 3-bet game. Then, the game in the internal state carrying over the second BB winning will continue endlessly.

Here, since the 1st BB winning is established only in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB winning is established only in the 2-bet game as described above, 3 in the situation where the 2nd BB winning is carried over. Even if the result is not won in any of the roles in the bet game, the 2nd BB prize will not be established, and if the result is lost in the 2-bet game in the situation where the 1st BB winning is carried over. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to dramatically simplify the winning combination and the control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the internal state in which the first BB winning and the second BB winning are carried over. If the configuration is such that the 2nd BB winning can be established in the 3-bet game, or the 1st BB winning can be established in the 2-bet game, the internal state in which the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is carried over is carried over. This is because, when trying to continue, it is necessary to make a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a role that may be missed, it is necessary to win another role at the time of the drop.

Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role of increasing medals is a common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role of increasing medals in the 2-bet game is the common bell, while the main role of increasing the medals in the 3-bet game is the push order bell. .. For the common bell, any of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, whereas for the push order bell, the prize is established. , The small winning combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In other words, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game are wider than the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, depending on the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the push order bell is won. Is big. Then, for example, the AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation order (FIG. 23) from the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won. By switching between the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and the non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game of operating the first credit insertion switch 56, first, the game is played in a 2-bet game in a non-internal state, and the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. When the second BB is won, the internal state is set, the game is switched to the 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state where the winning second BB prize cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the game in the internal state in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over is not won in the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning. It will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise of a game in which the second BB winning is carried over, the game performance using the notification (pushing order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell in the game (also referred to as a normal game in the following explanation) is provided. explain.

<Processing for lottery results>
First, the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. The lottery result correspondence process is a process performed after the lottery process of each game is performed, and is a process of performing a transition lottery to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of grasping the number of bets of the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the number of bets is 2. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the first BB and the second BB, and in the internal state after winning the first BB and the second BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified bet number, and the first BB state and the second BB are set. In the state, 3 is set as the specified number of bets. The process of step S602 and step S603 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific specified number (specified set number) that is specified (set) in association with the game state. If there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (process for the instruction function) after step S604.

That is, in the non-internal state or the internal state, the processing for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, but the processing for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. Further, in the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the 2-bet game is not executed, and the process for the display mode is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the internal state is played in a two-bet game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make the internal state play in a 3-bet game and facilitate a normal game in which the second BB is carried over.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding whether or not the push order notification or the like is generated, an advantageous section in which the push order notification or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is an advantageous section, is set based on the transition to the advantageous section, and is cleared based on the transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is a normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result correspondence process ends.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, the lottery result of this game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the transition rate to the advantageous section (winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, as the trigger of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, watermelon, and special role are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game in which the second BB is carried over, all the winning results are set as a trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, the process of acquiring the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S703. As the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and the latest updated value of the counter is acquired in step S703. Then, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S704, and it is determined in step S705 whether or not the transition lottery has been won. By the way, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so as to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the result of the game grasped in step S701 is a trigger for the transition lottery (not an out-of-order result), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting the advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the game has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section in this game. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result correspondence process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not any of the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is in the AT mode, and is a flag set when the transition to the AT mode is possible. Further, the AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the situation is that the AT mode transition lottery is won, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed, and the status is before the AT mode transition. Is. If neither flag is set in step S606, the start AT lottery process is executed in step S607. On the other hand, when any of the flags is set in step S606, the continuation determination process is executed in step S608, and the AT addition process is executed in step S609.

<Process for AT lottery at the start>
First, the AT lottery process at the start of step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, it is determined whether the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are 0. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing a transition to AT mode regardless of whether or not the AT mode transition lottery is successful (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the number of ceiling games. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, the subtraction of the ceiling counter is executed at the end of the game. That is, when the ceiling counter is determined to be 0 in step S801, it means that the number of ceiling games has become 0 in the previous game.

If the ceiling counter is not 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S802 to S807.

That is, in step S802, a process of acquiring a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is executed. As the random number for the AT mode transition lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S802, the latest updated value of the counter is acquired. In the following step S803, a process of grasping the lottery result of this game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. In the present embodiment, as display modes in which the winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery are different, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal mode are set, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. It is a flag for the CPU to grasp that.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S804, the process of acquiring the start normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S805. On the other hand, when the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, the process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start is executed in step S806.

As shown in FIG. 30, the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start are set with the winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery according to the lottery result of the game. For example, in the case of an AT mode transition lottery triggered by chance A, there is a 1% probability of winning the AT mode transition for normal use, and a 3% probability of winning the AT mode transition for CZ. As described above, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start is set so as to be easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start. Further, the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C are set so that the normal rip A, the normal rip B, and the normal rip C cannot win the AT mode transition for the normal use, while they can win the AT mode transition for the CZ.

By the way, in the AT mode transition lottery table for normal start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start used in the AT lottery process at the start, if the lottery result of the game is a special role, the AT mode transition winning It is set not to be. In the AT lottery process at the start, the AT mode transition lottery may not be performed in the wake of a special role.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S805 or step S806, the acquired transition lottery table, the game lottery result grasped in step S803, and the random number for AT lottery acquired in step S802 are used. , Is used to execute the AT mode transition lottery process in step S807. Specifically, whether or not the random number for AT lottery acquired in step S802 is within the numerical range for winning set according to the lottery result of each game in the table acquired in step S805 or step S806. If the random number for the AT lottery is within the numerical range for winning, it is determined that the random number for the AT lottery is within the numerical range for winning, and if the random number for the AT lottery is outside the numerical range for winning, the transition to the AT mode is performed. Judged as non-winning. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been won.

When it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition is won, and when it is determined in step S802 that the ceiling counter is 0, the processes for AT mode winning in steps S809 to S812 are executed. If it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition is not won, the process for not winning the AT mode is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the process for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition is won in the CZ mode. If the winner is in the CZ mode, a process for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps S810 and S811. That is, in step S810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S811, the process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and when shifting to the CZ mode, a value (10) corresponding to the number of continuous games (10 games) in the CZ mode is input, and the game is played. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S812. By such processing, affirmative determination is made in step S606 from the next game.

In the process for not winning the AT mode, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. If the CZ mode flag is not set, the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the CZ mode by using the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803. .. As shown in FIG. 30, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game, and more specifically, the AT mode transition lottery is won. The easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. That is, even though the lottery result of the game is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is set so that the transition to the CZ mode is easy.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the transition is won, and if not, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. In the case of winning the CZ mode transition, the process of setting the CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S816.

After setting either the winning flag in step S812 or step S816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The precursor mode is a mode for performing a precursor effect suggesting that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery. In the present embodiment, when these transition lottery is won, 0 games to 40 games are played. Notification of the transition lottery that has been won after passing through the precursor mode of.

In step S817, the lottery process of the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursor games, the number of precursor games is drawn according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, it is easier to select a longer precursor game number than when the CZ mode transition lottery is won, or when the transition lottery is won in Cherry A. It is easier to select a longer precursor game number than when the player wins the transition lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode is terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery was won through the termination of the CZ mode. Can be grasped by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the precursor mode is set to 0 game, and even though it is known that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the transition lottery is won. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity caused by the suggestion notification of what has been done as the precursor mode.

In the following step S818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step S817 into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The precursor counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games of the precursor game, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the game in the precursor mode is exhausted.

Then, in step S819, a process of setting a precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and in step S820, a process of setting a precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT lottery is performed. End the processing. The precursor flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the precursor mode is in progress, and the precursor command indicates that the precursor mode has been set, the number of games in the precursor mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The display control device 81 that has received the precursor command grasps the number of games in the precursor mode and the type of the winning transition lottery, and performs a process for executing the effect in the precursor mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuing judgment processing>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games is set as one set (unit continuation number, unit state), and for example, one set of AT modes is updated (set). When starting or ending the set), a continuous lottery for the next set is performed, and if the continuous lottery is won, after the end of the set, the game moves to the next set and the continuous lottery is not won. If this is the case, the AT mode is terminated without moving to the next set. Then, in the continuation determination process of step S608, it is a process for performing the above-mentioned continuous lottery when updating the set.

In step S901, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is a set of start games in AT mode. If it is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated as it is. If it is a start game, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 0. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set even if the above continuous lottery is not won or the continuous lottery is not performed, and the continuation condition is It is a counter in which 1 is added when an additional win is made in the established situation, and 1 is subtracted when the continuous lottery is not won or when the continuous lottery is continued to the next set. When the AT set counter is 0, the winning probability of the continuous lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped in step S903.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the winning probability of the above-mentioned continuous lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “continuation rate”), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 42, the most continuous. The high rate of 90% and the lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set at the time of transition to the AT mode (continuation rate setting process in step S1211, which will be described later). In step S903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read out, and the continuation rate of the current AT mode is grasped.

After grasping the continuation rate in step S903, the continuation lottery process is executed in step S904. That is, when the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the continuation winning is performed with a probability of 90% in the process of step S904, and when the continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10 is selected in the process of step S904. There is a% chance that you will continue to win.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S904 is a continuous winning, and if it is a continuous winning, a process of setting a continuation flag in various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S906. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the continuation condition (condition for shifting to the next set) of this set is satisfied. Then, in step S907, the process of setting the continuation command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the continuation determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed in step S908, and then the process proceeds to step S906 to set the continuation flag and the continuation command. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without going through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuous lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be satisfied if the AT set counter is 1 or more when the continuous lottery is not won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of one set of AT mode (when the start lever 41 is operated), the success or failure of the continuation condition of whether or not the AT mode continues until the next set of the set to be started this time. When the determination is made and it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, the continuation flag is set and the information is output to the display control device 81. In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing the effect on the premise that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of this set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that the winning is not continuous, the continuation determination process is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set of AT mode, and the continuation command is not output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not satisfied by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs an effect on the premise that the continuation condition is not satisfied as the effect of this set. Perform the process to do so.

<Process for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. In the AT addition process, in addition to the above continuous lottery, an additional lottery is performed by adding the number of AT mode sets, and if the additional lottery is won, the result of the continuous lottery for the next set is not relevant. Try to continue until the next set.

First, in step S1001, a process of acquiring a random number for an additional lottery is executed. As the random number for the additional lottery, a dedicated counter of various counter areas 106e is used, the dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined cycle, and in step S1001, the latest updated value of the counter is acquired. In the following step S1002, the lottery result of this game is grasped. Then, in step S1003, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the additional lottery table, the additional winning rate is set according to the lottery result of the game, and it is easy to win in the lottery process of each game. While normal roles such as bells do not win additional prizes, it is set so that specific roles such as chance eyes A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, common bells, and watermelons, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, can be added and won. Has been done. Then, among the specific roles, for example, the chance eye C is easier to add and win than the chance eye A, and the cherry C is easier to add and win than the cherry A, and so on, in the lottery process of each game. The more difficult the lottery result is, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. If the lottery result of each game is a normal winning combination, the additional lottery may not be performed, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal winning combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. Further, even if the lottery result of each game is a normal winning combination, the additional winning may be made so that the probability of the additional winning in the normal winning combination is lower than the probability of the additional winning in the case of the specific winning combination. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the game is a special role, although it is set so as not to win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery processing at the start as described above, the additional lottery in the AT addition processing is performed. Then, even if it is a special role, it is set so that it can be added and won.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S1003, the additional lottery is executed in step S1004. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the random number for the additional lottery acquired in step S1001 is within the numerical range for winning set according to the lottery result of each game in the table acquired in step S1003. If the random number for the additional lottery is within the numerical range for winning, it is determined to be an additional winning, and if the random number for the additional lottery is outside the numerical range for winning, it is determined to be a non-winning additional lottery. After the additional lottery is performed in step S1004, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional lottery is not won, the AT addition process is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step S1006, the process of setting the continuation flag is executed in step S1007. Then, in step S1008, the process of setting the continuation command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for adding the AT is terminated. Upon receiving the continuation command, the display control device 81 executes a process for performing the effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

On the other hand, when the continuation flag is set in step S1006, the process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step S1009. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step S1009, it is determined that the AT mode continues at least until the next set following the current set. In this embodiment, 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when the additional lottery is won, but a number of 2 or more may be added, for example, an opportunity for the additional winning. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game.

In the following step S1010, the process of setting the set addition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main addition process is terminated. The set addition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the addition lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In the case where a plurality of sets are added by one addition and winning, it is preferable to set the information of the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes a process for performing the effect corresponding to the set addition on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64.

In the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 28), after the process of step S607 or step S609 is executed, the process for notifying the push order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in steps S610 to S619.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the push order notification process executed in steps S610 to S619, an outline of the push order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the push order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65. Will be explained. The push order notification and the push order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, push order navigation, order notification, and mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the push order notification is performed by the main control device 101. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the push order notification effect.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. 34 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to turn on the light. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8 in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segments N1 to 7 display segments N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "0" to "6" and "9" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "0" to "6" and "9", "0." to "6.", "9.", and ".".

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and further, 7 instead of 8 segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8. A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 have different winning results depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. Among the operation mode combinations, the winning results differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is a display segment used when notifying the operation order of the order combination and when notifying the type of the operation mode combination.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the display of "1" to "6" corresponds to the notification of the operation order of the push order combination, and for example, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is ". When the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left" → "middle" → "right", the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed as "1". Is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), "0" and "9" correspond to the notification of the type of the operation mode combination, and when it is the push order bell among the push order combinations in the operation mode combination. , The first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, and the fourth display segment N4 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "0" is displayed. In this case, although the player can grasp that the push order bell has been won from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68, even if the push order bell is used, as in the case of FIG. 34 (b) above. Since the advantageous operation mode is not specified, the advantageous operation mode cannot be grasped from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68.

Further, in the case of a special combination in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "9" is displayed. Is displayed. As described above, in the case of a special combination, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd small combination prize is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are set in the second operation mode. When the operation is performed, the first small winning combination prize to the sixth small winning combination winning are established, and these first operation modes and the second operation modes are predetermined operation modes. That is, when the instruction monitor 68 is notified that it is a special combination as described above, by operating in the second operation mode, the first small combination winning to the sixth small with a large number of payouts is performed. It is possible to establish a winning combination.

The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and when a predetermined start condition including a notification condition that causes a push order notification to occur is satisfied, the eighth display segment N8 is lit in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. .. Further, it is turned off when the AT mode ends and the section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

That is, the section in which the operation order of the push order bell or the like is easily notified so that the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the push order notification is actually obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It serves as a section display (specific notification means).

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that the oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when the lighting state is set), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display section (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined (so that the illuminance is doubled). Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Next, the push order notification effect performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and it is displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a numerical value is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 35B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can be advanced at a good tempo.

The process for notifying the push order in steps S610 to S619 will be described.

That is, in step S610, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. When the AT mode flag is set, the instruction monitor 68 is set so that the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed in step S612 according to the type of the pushing order bell this time. Control. Then, in step S613, the push order notification commands set to include the information of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning are set as output targets to the display control device 81. After executing the process, the process for notifying the final push order is terminated. That is, in step S613, a process of setting any one of the first small winning combination push order notification command to the sixth small winning combination push order notification command is executed. The display control device 81 that has received these push order notification commands controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step S611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled in step S614 so that the group notification of the push order bell (FIG. 34 (c)) is performed. That is, in step S614, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the notification that the push order bell is performed among the operation mode combinations is performed. After that, the lottery result handling process is completed.

If it is determined in step S610 that the push order bell is not won, it is determined in step S615 whether or not the special combination is won. If the special role is not won, the process for dealing with the result of this lottery is terminated as it is. If the special combination is won, it is determined in step S616 whether or not the AT mode flag is set.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step S616, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the special combination notification (FIG. 34 (c)) is performed in step S617. That is, in step S617, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the notification that the operation mode combination is a special combination is performed. After that, the lottery result handling process is completed.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S616, the process proceeds to step S618. In step S618, among the operation sequences corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning, the instruction monitor 68 is instructed to perform the push order notification corresponding to the sixth small winning combination winning as a predetermined operation order. To control. Then, in step S619, a process of setting a push order notification command for the sixth small winning combination, which is set to include information on the operation order corresponding to the sixth small winning combination, as an output target to the display control device 81. Is executed, and then the process for notifying the final push order is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this push order notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the game in which the push order bell of the operation mode combinations is won is in the AT mode, the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established on the instruction monitor 68. The operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified, and the push order notification command including the operation order information is output to the display control device 81, and the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is produced. Will be done. On the other hand, if the game in which the push order bell is won is not in the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 notifies that the push order bell is a push order bell, but the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established. Since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enables the operation is not notified and the push order notification command including the operation order information is not output to the display control device 81, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed. Is not done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lottery result command setting process of step S311 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in the game in which the push order bell is won, any result (IV11 to 22) of the push order bells is obtained. Information on whether or not the player has won is not output to the display control device 81.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36 (a), in step S1101, whether or not this game is won with an index value IV = 11 to 22 and one of the push order bells is won. Is determined. If the push order bell is not won, in step S1102, a process of setting a lottery result command corresponding to each winning result as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main lottery result command setting process is terminated. .. That is, in step S1102, for example, when the winner is won at the index value IV = 1, the lottery result command indicating the normal lip A is set, and when the winner is won at the index value I = 8, the cherry A is shown. A lottery result command is set, and if a winner is won at an index value IV = 27, a lottery result command indicating a special role is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1101 that one of the push order bells has been won, the lottery result command indicating the push order bell group is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1103. After executing the process, the final lottery result command setting process is terminated. The lottery result command indicating the push order bell group contains information that one of the push order bells has been won, but information on which push order bell has been won, that is, for example, the forward push bell. Information that you have won 1 (information that you have won at IV = 11) and information that you have won the middle reverse push bell 2 (information that you have won at IV = 18) Information) is set not to include information such as.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the present embodiment, the information that the push order bell has been won is a lottery result command indicating the push order bell group regardless of whether or not the AT mode is in effect. Is output to the display control device 81. Then, in the AT mode, the push order notification command for the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is output together, so that the display control device 81 can execute the push order notification effect. On the other hand, when not in the AT mode, the push order notification command for the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is not output to the display control device 81, and as described above, the lottery result indicating the push order bell group is not output. Since only commands are output, on the display control device 81 side, even though it is not in AT mode, it is possible to establish the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination when the push order bell is won. The operation order of 44 cannot be grasped. By doing so, the command output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 and the display control device 81 are illegally analyzed, and the benefits of the AT mode (push) even though it is not the AT mode. It is possible to prevent cheating and the like from enjoying the benefits of being able to establish the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination at the time of winning the order bell.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the special combination is won in the AT mode, the push order notification for the 6th small combination winning among the 1st small combination winning to the 6th small winning combination and the 33rd small winning combination is notified. It is executed on the instruction monitor 68, and a push order notification command for winning the sixth small winning combination is output. By doing so, in the AT mode, the first small winning combination prize to the sixth small winning combination winning side, which is the side with a large number of payouts, is not the 33rd small winning combination winning side, which is the side with a small number of payouts. It is possible to establish 6 small winning combination prizes, and it is possible to improve the advantage of the AT mode.

Not only that, but from the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination on the side with the largest number of payouts, the push order notification for the 6th small winning combination, which is the predetermined small winning combination (pushing order), is instructed. It is executed on the monitor 68, and the push order notification command for the sixth small winning combination is output. By doing so, it is not necessary to select which of the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is to be established when the special role is won, and the processing is greatly simplified. It is possible to plan.

Further, as described above, if the special role winning is in the AT mode, the additional lottery is applied in the AT addition process in the lottery result handling process. It is higher than the winning probability of the additional lottery when the order bell is won, and it is set so that the additional winning is won with a 10% probability when the special role is won, while the additional winning is not performed when the push order bell is won. In this case, when the special winning combination is won in the AT mode, the pushing order for the 6th small winning combination of the pushing order notifications for the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination notified at the time of winning the push order bell In addition to notifying, the push order notification command for the 6th small winning combination of the pushing order notification commands for the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination, which is output when the push order bell is won, is output. Therefore, it is possible to successfully mix the special role winning in AT mode with the pushing order bell winning, and it is possible to give the impression that an additional lottery is being performed based on the pushing order bell winning. Become. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention at the time of winning the push order bell while not increasing the benefits (probability of winning the additional lottery, etc.) at the time of winning the push order bell too much.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result handling process performed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In the winning result handling process, processing for starting and ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1201, it is grasped whether or not one of the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the number of bets is 3. Further, in the case of the BB state, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the number of bets is 2. That is, the processes of steps S1201 to S1203 are processes corresponding to the processes of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not the number is one specific specified number associated with the gaming state. It is a process. If the number is not a specific specified number, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated without performing the process for the display mode (process for the instruction function) after step S1204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202 or step S1203 and the number of bets is a specific specified number, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is not set, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If neither the AT mode flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1206 and the stop AT lottery process is executed.

<Process for AT lottery at stop>
The process for AT lottery when stopped in step S1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1301, a process of grasping the lottery result of this game is executed. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special role. If it is a special role, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of this game is the first operation mode.

As already explained, in the game in which the special combination is won, the 33rd small combination prize is established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and the first small combination prize is established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode. The sixth small role prize is established. In this case, the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be temporarily stored in a register or the like, and step S1303 may be configured to determine whether or not the operation mode is the first operation mode, or the winning result may be grasped. As a result, it is determined that the operation was performed in the first operation mode from the fact that the 33rd small winning combination prize has been established (neither the 1st small winning combination prize nor the 6th small winning combination winning has been established). May be good.

In particular, in the special role, the 33rd small winning combination cannot be established even in the first operation mode, resulting in omission, or the first small winning combination winning even in the second operation mode. -In the case where the sixth small winning combination cannot be established and the configuration is such that a missed item occurs, the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 are memorized as in the former case. It is preferable to use the information to determine which operation mode is used. On the contrary, as in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the 33rd small winning combination prize is not missed in at least the first operation mode, the 33rd small winning combination winning is established, so that the first operation is performed. It is good to judge that the operation was performed in the mode, and if the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established and the special combination is won, the second operation mode is used instead of the first operation mode. It may be configured to be judged to have existed.

In step S1303, it is determined that the operation was performed in the first operation mode when the special combination was won, and in step S1302, it was determined that the result was a lottery other than the special combination. The process of subtracting the counter is executed, and then the process of AT mode transition lottery or the like is executed in steps S1307 to S1323. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1303 that the operation is performed not in the first operation mode but in the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the ceiling counter is not subtracted or the AT mode transition lottery is performed as it is. When stopped, the AT lottery process is terminated.

That is, as described above, when the special combination is won, the 33rd small combination prize is established by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode. By doing so, in the configuration where the number of medals paid out is larger than that at the time of the 33rd small winning combination, the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination are established. Etc. are executed, whereas in the case of the second operation mode, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter, the AT mode transition lottery, and the like are not executed. Further, in the process for AT lottery at the start, the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery based on the special combination winning is not performed. Therefore, when the special combination is won, the number of medals paid out is larger when the operation is performed in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode, but when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the processing related to the instruction function is performed in the first operation mode. It is carried out in a more restricted manner than in the case of. In this way, diversification of games is being attempted as a game property in which the player can select which benefit to enjoy.

In the process for subtracting the ceiling counter, the subtraction value lottery process is executed in step S1304. In the subtraction value lottery process, the ceiling subtraction value table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and the value to be subtracted from the ceiling counter in this game is determined by lottery based on the lottery result grasped in step S1301. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, 1 to 100 are set as the subtraction value, and basically 1 is easily selected as a so-called rare role in the lottery results other than the special role, including the out-of-order result. When a specific winning combination is won, a subtraction value larger than 1 may be subtracted from the ceiling counter. On the other hand, when the special combination is won, the probability that a subtraction value larger than 1 is selected is higher than when the specific combination is won.

After executing the subtraction value lottery process in step S1304, the process of setting the subtraction value command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S1305. The subtraction value command contains information about the subtraction value of this game. After that, in step S1306, a process of subtracting the subtraction value drawn in step S1304 from the ceiling counter is executed. By the way, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT mode winning flag is set in the AT lottery processing at the start of the next game as described above. In step S1306, when the subtracted value of this time is larger than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter is set to 0 so that it does not become a negative value. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an error caused by a negative value. However, if the subtracted value this time is larger than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, it may be configured to cause an advantageous event for the player, and an advantageous event is generated according to the difference between the remaining number and the subtracted value. It may occur or have different types of favorable events. Advantageous events include, for example, adding an AT mode set, making it easier to select an advantageous second AT mode as an AT mode type, generating a suggestion effect of a set value, or displaying a rare image. Can be considered.

After the ceiling counter is subtracted in step S1306, the AT mode lottery process is executed in steps S1307 to S1311. That is, in step S1307, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag or the CZ mode winning flag is set. If neither of the flags is set, the process of acquiring the stop normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed in step S1308. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag and the CZ mode winning flag are set and the transition to the CZ mode or the CZ mode is confirmed, the AT for CZ when stopped from the various table storage areas 105a in step S1309. The process of acquiring the mode transition lottery table is executed.

While these stop-time normal AT mode transition lottery tables and stop-time CZ AT mode transition lottery tables are set so as to be able to win the AT mode transition when they are special roles, as shown in FIG. 39. , Other lottery results are set so as not to win the AT mode transition. This is because, in the lottery results other than the special role, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the start AT lottery process, and by doing so, the transition lottery is performed duplicately at the start time and the stop time. I try not to raise the ball output rate by being hit. In addition, comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use at stop and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at stop, it is easier to win the AT mode transition for CZ than for normal use as at the start. Is set to.

The relationship between the appearance rate (winning probability) of each lottery result in the 3-bet game and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery result will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

As already explained, in the AT lottery process at the start, the lottery result with a lower appearance rate in each game is set so that the AT mode transition winning is more likely to occur, for example, it appears with a probability of about 1/164. Chance A has a 3% chance of winning the AT mode transition in CZ mode, and chance B, which appears with a probability of about 1/262, has a 5% chance of winning the AT mode transition in CZ mode. In this case, in the CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition with the chance eye A as an opportunity is about 1 in 5460, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition with the chance eye B as an opportunity is about 1 in 5240. .. On the other hand, in the stop AT lottery process, when the special combination that appears with a probability of about 1/20 is won, the AT mode shifts with a probability of about 1/40 by operating in the first operation mode. In the CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition with a special role is about 1/200.

That is, the ratio of winning the AT mode transition to the special role is set to be overwhelmingly higher than other results. Specifically, in the CZ mode, about 200 is triggered by the special role. AT mode transition wins with a probability of 1 in, AT mode transition wins with a probability of about 1/178 when a non-special role is triggered, and about half in CZ mode wins AT mode transition with a special role as a trigger. become.

However, as described above, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode in the game in which the special combination is won, the AT mode transition lottery itself is not performed, so that the AT mode transition is performed. In terms of playability aiming at winning, it is advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special combination even if the number of medals paid out is small.

After acquiring each transition lottery table, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S1310. Then, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition has been won.

If the AT mode transition is won, the process for AT mode winning is executed in steps S1312-step S1315, and if the AT mode transition winning is not obtained, the process for CZ mode is executed in steps S1316 to S1319. Execute the process. After that, the process for the precursor mode is executed in steps S1320 to S1323, and then the stop AT lottery process is terminated. The process of steps S1312 to S1323 is the same as the process of steps S809 to S820 in the process for starting AT lottery.

Even in the stop AT lottery process, if the AT mode transition is won or the CZ mode transition is won, the number of precursor games is set and the precursor command is output. Then, if the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0. In this case, in the precursor game number process (step S1208) executed following the AT lottery process at the time of this stop, a process for starting the AT mode from the next game is performed. That is, whether the AT mode transition is won in the start AT lottery process during the CZ mode or the AT mode transition is won in the stop AT lottery process, the same applies to the AT in this game. The notification that the mode transition has been won is notified, and the AT mode will be started from the next game.

The explanation returns to the explanation of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 37).

If it is determined in step S1205 that the AT mode transition lottery has already been won, and after the stop AT lottery process is executed in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. If the precursor flag is set, in step S1208, the process for the number of precursor games is executed, and then the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the process for the number of CZ games is executed in step S1210, and then the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1204 and the AT mode is in progress, the process for the number of AT games is executed in step S1211, and then the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

Hereinafter, the processing for the number of precursor games, the processing for the number of CZ games, and the processing for the number of AT games will be described.

<Processing for the number of precursor games>
In the process for the number of precursor games, as shown in FIG. 41, the process of subtracting 1 from the precursor counter is executed in step S1401. If the number of precursor games is set to 0 in the process of setting the number of precursor games in the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process (when 0 is input to the precursor counter). , The precursor counter is not subtracted in step S1401. Then, in step S1402, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter is 0, and if it is not 0, the precursor mode process is terminated as it is. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step S1403.

In the following step S1404, by determining whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time has shifted based on winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the precursor mode this time is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, a process of clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, the CZ mode flag is set in step S1406, and the process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1407. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1408, the process of setting the CZ start command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this precursor mode is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the CZ mode has been started as well as to notify that the CZ mode transition lottery has been won.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step S1404 and the precursor mode this time is a precursor mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is performed in step S1409. Run. Then, in step S1410, a process of setting the AT mode flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. In the following step S1411, the continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a predetermined number of games is set as one set, and the set is set in a situation where the number of remaining sets does not exist (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0). The AT mode is configured to continue until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process of step S1411 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the selection rates of the plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) provided are different depending on the set value set in the winning probability setting process. In step S1411, which continuation rate is selected is determined by lottery based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the ball output rate is set), the easier it is to select a higher continuation rate. For example, the continuation rate of 60% is set to 1. Is selected with a 30% probability, whereas in setting 6, it is selected with a 70% probability. However, the 90% continuation rate is easier to select in the odd number setting than in the even number setting, and the setting value most easily selected is the setting 5. When the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the 90% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and when the continuation rate of 60% is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. If 10% continuation rate is selected, the 10% flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The information indicating each of these continuation rates (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery of each set is performed at the continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step S1411, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step S1412. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of the AT mode is completed, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, a predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0. If not, the AT mode will be terminated.

After that, in step S1412, the process of setting the AT start command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and the process for the precursor mode is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode. In this case, the AT mode will be started from the game next to the game ending this time.

<Processing for the number of CZ games>
In the process for the number of CZ games, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1501. In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter becomes 0 based on the processing result of step S1501. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated as it is.

If the CZ game counter is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1503. After that, in step S1504, the process of setting the CZ end command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this CZ mode is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ end command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the CZ mode has ended.

As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and the mode shifts to the precursor mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1503, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<Processing for the number of AT games>
In the process for the number of AT games, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1601. In the following step S1602, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1601. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated as it is.

When the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the continuation flag is set. When the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the process for shifting to the next set (step S1604 to step S1606) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S1603, the process for terminating the AT mode (step S1607 to step S1610) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step S1603, the process of clearing the continuation flag is executed in step S1604. Then, in step S1604, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step S1606, the process of setting the set update command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this AT mode is executed. To finish. Upon receiving the set update command, the display control device 81 executes a process for updating the effects of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift of the AT mode set.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step S1603, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1607, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step S1608. Execute the process. Then, in step S1609, a process of setting the AT mode end flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. After that, in step S1610, the process of setting the AT end command as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process for this AT mode is terminated. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section at the end of the AT mode. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the end of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, the section display first process and the section display second process for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator, shifting to the advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The section display first process is a process performed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41 and based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates a case where at least a specific section in which the notification condition in which the push order notification can occur is satisfied, among the advantageous sections. If a negative determination is made in step S1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1702.

In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag set when the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the advantageous section transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. When the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1703. Then, in step S1704, the process of setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1705, a process is performed to start counting the number of games in the advantageous section, and more specifically, to start measuring the number of games AG in the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e. The advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1706, the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section is executed. The process at the time of transition to the advantageous section is a process for setting the state and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section to be transferred this time. Specifically, in the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the above ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games that allow the transition to AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter may be performed using, for example, the set value or the lottery result of the game. The higher the setting, the easier it is to select a shorter number of ceiling games, or the even setting is better than the odd setting. It is preferable to make it easier to select the number of short ceiling games, or to make it easier to select the number of short ceiling games as the result of the lottery of this game is difficult to win. Then, a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, the number of ceiling games is suggested by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81. The effect may be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of ceiling games is set to 700. That is, after shifting to the advantageous section, the ceiling counter is normally set to 0 and the AT mode winning flag is set by digesting at least 700 games.

However, as described above, if each game is not played with a specific specified number of bets, the ceiling counter is not subtracted, and when the special combination is won, the game is stopped in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. Even when the switches 42 to 44 are operated, the ceiling counter is not subtracted. Therefore, even when the number of games actually played is 700 or more, the ceiling counter may not be 0 and the AT mode winning flag may not be set. In addition, the subtraction value of the ceiling counter may be selected to be more than 1 in each game, and the ceiling counter is used before the number of games corresponding to the value of the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section is exhausted. May be 0.

In the section display first process, after the advantageous section transition process is executed in step S1706, the section display is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8 in step S1707.

When it is determined in step S1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, in step S1708, a process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, in step S1708, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is performed. That is, the process for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display process.

If it is determined in step S1702 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after the display start process is executed in step S1707 or the display continuation process in step S1708 is executed, the AT mode is executed in step S1709. Determine if the flag is set. If it is determined in step S1709 that none of the AT mode flags is set, in step S1710, a process of adding 1 to the combination ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The combination ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1709 that any AT mode flag is set, in step S1711, 1 is added to the combination ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. Run. The combination ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1710 or step S1711, the combination ratio calculation process is executed in step S1712. In such a process, the value of the combination ratio second counter is divided by the addition value (total number of games) of the combination ratio first counter and the combination ratio second counter. That is, the combination ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur to the total number of games. Then, in step S1713, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1712 on the combination monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the combination monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display units including seven display segments. Specifically, the combination monitor 77 has a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as a 7-segment display unit. There is. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and the individual light sources are on / off controlled. By doing so, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light any combination of display segments. As a result, the combination monitor 77 can display predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) individually, and in particular, the combination monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. There is.

In step S1713, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1712 is output to the combination monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e on the combination monitor 77 display the four-digit number on the combination monitor 77. Display control is performed. Specifically, the ratio of the number of games in which push order notification can occur out of the total number of games is a number smaller than 1 and up to 4 digits after the decimal point, for example, "0.5012". The numerical value is displayed on the combination monitor 77. After executing the process of step S1713, the section display first process is terminated.

It should be noted that the arithmetic processing in step S1712 may be configured to perform a process of rounding off a number having a fifth digit after the decimal point and then controlling the display of the combination ratio monitor 77. Further, among the role ratio monitors 77, the first display unit 77a basically displays "0", so that the first display unit 77a is not provided, the first display unit 77a is printed, and the like. It may be configured so that "0" is always displayed. Further, it is preferable that the decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (Processing for winning results) will be performed.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, the process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S1802. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. In the following step S1803, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step S1803, the number of inserted sheets (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts on condition that the game result of this game is not one of the re-game winnings, and the subtraction result is the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. By adding to, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is updated.

After executing the MY update process in step S1803, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in the subsequent step S1805. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, is the total of the advantageous section game number AG (the number of digested games in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section? Know if or not. Then, in such a situation, as a flag for specifying the situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and the first excess flag including the information that the first excess flag is set is included. The excess command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 cards) in the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the total of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number MY is the increase / decrease number in the advantageous section. Know if there are more situations. Then, in such a situation, as a flag for specifying the situation, the second excess flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d, and the second excess flag including the information that the second excess flag is set is included. The excess command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

After executing the remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process, in step S1806, whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous section game number AG reaches 1500, which is the upper limit number of games, or the upper limit increase in the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. When any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, in step S1807, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1808, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1809, after executing the process of initializing the parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second process of displaying this section is terminated.

Regarding the initialization process of the advantageous section information in step S1809, specifically, the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section this time are set as initial values. Execute the process to return to. For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, and the like are not cleared and are set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the advantageous section game number AG, the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, and the like are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process of the information for the advantageous section, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process for clearing RAM for variables or parameters.

If it is determined in step S1806 that the advantageous section game number AG has not reached the upper limit value and the advantageous section increase / decrease number MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1810 and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine if it is. If the AT mode end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1807 to execute the process for ending the advantageous section. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the process for ending the advantageous section is executed as it is.

<Production setting process>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1902, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after the process of step S1902 is executed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of the normal process. If it is a bet-time command, the bet-time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current bet operation is executed in step S1904.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or after the process of step S1904 is executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and corresponds to the lottery result in addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process. There are precursor commands, continuation commands, set addition commands, push order notification commands, etc. that are set in processing (FIG. 27) and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1906.

When a negative determination is made in step S1905, or after the process of step S1906 is executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is a command output from step S406 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). It is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S1908 executes each stop operation effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or after the process of step S1908 is executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S419 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, the second BB end command, the precursor command, and the CZ set in the bonus state processing (FIG. 24) and the winning result correspondence processing (FIG. 36). There are a start command, an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these commands at the time of total stop, the effect setting process at the time of total stop is executed in step S1910.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after the process of step S1910 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above-mentioned effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timings. Further, in step S1911, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than the bet time, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the main control device 101 is not used. Settings for effects based on signals from sensors connected to (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

Hereinafter, the start effect setting process and the all stop effect setting process will be described.

<Starting effect setting process>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the received lottery result command is a lottery result command indicating the push order bell group. As described above, in the lottery result command setting process (FIG. 36 (a)) in the present embodiment, if any of the push order bells is used, the push order bell group is used instead of the lottery result command indicating the individual result. It is configured to output the lottery result command shown. If the game has received the lottery result command indicating the push order bell group in step S2001 and has won any of the push order bells, the game proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not any push order notification command has been received. As already explained, if any of the push order bells is won during the AT mode, the operation to establish the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination depending on the type of the winning push order bell. The push order notification command corresponding to the order is output (see FIG. 36 (b)). When any of the push order notification commands is received, the setting for performing the corresponding push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S2003.

When it is determined in step S2001 that the lottery result command indicating the push order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the lottery result command indicating the special combination has been received. An affirmative determination is made in step S2004, and if the lottery result of this game is a special role, it is determined in step S2005 whether or not the push order notification command has been received. As already explained, in the game in which the special role is won during the AT mode, the push order notification command corresponding to the operation order for establishing the 6th small role winning among the 1st small role winning to the 6th small winning combination is It is configured to be output (see FIG. 36 (b)). When the push order notification command is received, the process proceeds to step S2003, and the setting for performing the push order notification effect for the sixth small winning combination prize on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed.

When it is determined in step S2004 that the lottery result command indicating the special combination has not been received, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the lottery result command indicating any specific combination has been received. As already explained, the specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is hard to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game, and in this embodiment, chance eye A to chance eye C, cherry. A to cherry C and watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery in the start AT lottery processing triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than the other lottery results. Further, in the additional lottery in the AT mode, if the specific combination is won, the additional lottery can be won, but if the normal combination such as the normal lip A is won, the additional lottery cannot be won. If the lottery result of this game is a specific combination winning, in step S2007, a process of setting a specific combination notification effect is executed. In the setting process of the specific role notification effect, a setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of this game is one of the above specific roles is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. .. As the specific combination notification, for example, an effect is set so that three characters of the exclamation mark are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, step S2005 or step S2006, or after executing the process of step S2003 or step S2007, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, the start time precursor effect setting process is executed. In the start-time precursor effect setting process, the process of setting the precursor mode is executed based on the precursor command output set in the start AT lottery process in the main control device 101, and the precursor of each game in the precursor mode is executed. Execute the process to set the effect. The start-time precursor effect setting process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The sub-side CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the CZ mode is in progress. When the sub-side CZ flag is set, the start CZ effect setting process is executed in step S2010. In the start CZ effect setting process, a process of setting the effect of the game to be started this time is executed according to the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode. The CZ effect setting process at the start will also be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is executed, the AT effect setting process is executed in step S2010. In the AT effect setting process, in the set management type AT mode in which 18 games as a predetermined number are set as one set, for example, if the ally character and the enemy character confront each other and the continuation condition of the set is satisfied, the ally character is concerned. Wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the process of setting the battle effect such that the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins is executed as the effect in one set. In this case, for example, in each of the 10 games in the first half of one set of games, the confrontation effect in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other is set, and in each of the 8 games in the latter half, the ally is set. Executes the process of setting so that the battle effect in which the character and the enemy character confront each other is performed.

After executing the AT effect setting process in step S2011, other start effect setting processes are executed in step S2012, and then the main start effect setting process ends. In step S2012, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process for turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is executed. do.

<Production setting process when all are stopped>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of total stop in step S1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, the second BB end command, the precursor command, and the CZ start command. , AT start command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, and other commands at the time of all stop, this is a process for setting the effect.

In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, the process of setting the sub-side CZ flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2102, and the CZ start effect is displayed as an auxiliary display as the bet time effect of the next game in step S2103. The effect setting process to be performed by the unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50A, the CZ start effect indicates that the CZ mode is started from this game and the number of remaining games (10) in the CZ mode is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. That is, when the CZ start command is received as the stop command, the CZ start effect is executed based on the bet operation of the next game after the game ends. By setting the sub-side CZ flag in step S2102, an affirmative determination is made in step S2009 in the start time effect setting process of the next game, and the start time CZ effect setting process is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not the above sub-side CZ flag has already been set. If the game has already been set and the game to be ended this time is a game in the CZ mode, the stopped CZ effect setting process is executed in step S2105. The stop CZ effect setting process is a process for modifying the effect in the CZ mode set in the start CZ effect setting process at the start of the game at the end of the game. The stopped CZ effect setting process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2104, it is determined in step S2106 whether or not the AT start command has been received. When the AT start command is received, the process of setting the sub-side AT flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2107, and the AT start process is executed in the subsequent step S2108. In the AT start process, for example, to execute a process of inputting the number of games of the set to be started into the game number counter for grasping the number of digested games of each set in the AT mode, or to grasp the continuation number of the set. The process of inputting 1 to the set counter of is executed, or the process of performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed as the effect at the time of betting in the next game. As the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), an effect of displaying that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is set. That is, when the AT start command is received as the stop command, the AT start effect is executed based on the bet operation of the next game after the game ends. In the AT start effect, for example, the background and the sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate so as to suggest the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step S2110, and the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed in step S2111. Run. For example, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the AT end effect is a notification of the end of the AT mode (character display such as "Matane") and notification of the number of continuous sets and the number of medals won in the current AT mode. The production to perform is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2109, it is determined in step S2112 whether or not the set update command has been received. When the set update command is received, one set in the AT mode ends, and the process shifts to the next set, the set update process is executed in step S2113. In the set update process, the process of clearing the information regarding the existence of the continuation condition of the previous set at the start of this set is executed, and the process of inputting the number of games of this set into the above game number counter is executed. To do.

If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the stop sign effect setting process is executed in step S2114. As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are executed not only at the start of the game but also at the end of the game, and a precursory command can be output based on the result. The stop sign effect setting process executes a process of setting various effects of the precursor mode based on the precursor command output at the end of the game. The stoptime precursor mode setting process will be described in detail later.

After executing the processes of step S2103, step S2105, step S2108, step S2111, step S2113 or step S2114, the game number management process is executed in step S2115. The game number management process is a process of managing the number of games up to the ceiling from the transition to the advantageous section to the winning of the AT mode transition, and setting the effect when the ceiling is reached. The game number processing will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S2115, the other all-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2116, and then the all-stop effect setting process ends. In step S2116, processing for performing an effect corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB is performed, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is used. The sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and the sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Outline of CZ production>
Prior to the description of the start CZ effect setting process and the stop CZ effect setting process, an outline of the effect of each game in the CZ mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54 and the like.

As described above, the CZ mode in the present embodiment is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the normal mode. Then, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0, the notification that the AT mode transition is won in the game is notified, and the AT mode starts from the next game. I am trying to be done. That is, in the present embodiment, a complete notification type notification mode is adopted such that the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in each game in the CZ mode. By doing so, the flow of the game from the CZ mode to the AT mode can be made smoother, and the degree of attention of each game in the CZ mode can be suitably increased.

As a specific effect of each game in the CZ mode, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable regions of numerical characters are provided in the auxiliary display unit 65, and numerical characters that stop in the plurality of variable regions are a predetermined combination. By doing so, it is possible to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. In this embodiment, the case where characters having the same number are stopped and doublets are formed is set as a predetermined combination. For example, as shown in FIGS. 54 (a1) to 54 (c1), the left variable region SP1, the medium variable region SP2, and the right variable region SP3 are set in order from the left as the variable region of the numerical character in the auxiliary display unit 65. Then, as the numerical characters to be displayed in these variable regions SP1 to SP3, the numerical characters from 1 to 9 are set. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable regions SP1 to SP3 are variablely displayed in the vertical direction, for example, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are sequentially displayed from the left. To stop. FIG. 54 (a1) shows how the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop the numerical character in the left fluctuation region SP1, and FIG. 54 (b1) shows the middle stop switch 43 being operated to stop the middle fluctuation region. A figure 54 (c1) shows a state in which the number character is stopped in SP2, and FIG. 54 (c1) shows a state in which the right stop switch 44 is operated and the number character is stopped in the right fluctuation region SP3. In this case, in FIG. 54, although the character "1" having the same number in the left fluctuation region SP1 and the middle fluctuation region SP2 is stopped, the right fluctuation region SP3 has a different "4" from the number in the left. Character is stopped, indicating that a predetermined combination is not formed. That is, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won is performed.

Here, the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaceably provided from the initial position arranged on the front side of the slot machine 10 to the operation position arranged on the back side. The stop switches 42 to 44 are urged from the operation position toward the initial position by a spring or the like as an urging means, and are arranged at the initial position before the operation. By pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 arranged at the initial position toward the operation position and applying a force exceeding the urging force of the urging means to the back side, the stop switches 42 to 44 are directed toward the operation position. And displace. Then, when the hand or the like is released from the stop switches 42 to 44, the position returns to the initial position by the urging force of the urging means.

The detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a to the main control device 101 changes from the OFF state to the ON state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the initial position to the operation position, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are in the operation position. When it is displaced from to the initial position, it changes from the ON state to the OFF state. The main control device 101 grasps that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 rise from the OFF state to the ON state, thereby grasping that the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the initial position toward the operation position. By grasping that the detection signal from the stop switches 42 to 44 falls from the ON state to the OFF state, it is possible to grasp that the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the operation position to the initial position. It becomes possible.

In the following description, operating the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position toward the operation position is also referred to as a stop ON operation, and operating the stop switches 42 to 44 from the operation position toward the initial position (hand). Etc.) is also referred to as a stop OFF operation. Further, among the stop switches 42 to 44, the first stop ON operation is the first stop ON operation, the first stop OFF operation is the first stop OFF operation, and the second stop ON operation is the second stop ON operation, the second. The stop OFF operation is referred to as a second stop OFF operation, the third stop ON operation is referred to as a third stop ON operation, and the third stop OFF operation is referred to as a third stop OFF operation.

In the effect in the CZ mode, the stop of the numerical character of each of the above-mentioned variable regions SP1 to SP3 is executed based on the stop ON operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, as shown in FIG. 54 (a2), by stopping and turning on the left stop switch 42, the numerical character stops in the left fluctuation region SP1, and as shown in FIG. 54 (b2), the middle stop switch 43. By stopping ON operation, the numerical character stops in the middle fluctuation area SP2, and as shown in FIG. 54 (c2), by stopping ON operating the right stop switch 44, the numerical character in the right fluctuation region SP3. Stops.

It should be noted that the number character stops in the left fluctuation area SP1 during the first stop ON operation, the number character stops in the middle fluctuation area SP2 during the second stop ON operation, and the number character stops in the right fluctuation region SP3 during the third stop ON operation. Each variable region SP1 to SP3 where the numerical character stops is configured to have a one-to-one correspondence with the stop order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but each variable region SP1 where the numeric character stops is configured. ~ SP3 may be configured to be associated with each of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, for example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated as the first stop ON operation, the numerical character stops in the middle fluctuation region SP2, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated as the second stop ON operation, the right fluctuation region When the numeric character stops at SP3 and the left stop switch 42 is operated as the third stop ON operation, the numeric character may stop at the left fluctuation region SP1.

<CZ effect setting process at the start>
The start-time CZ effect setting process in step S2010 in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 48) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set. If the sub-side CZ flag is not set, the CZ effect setting process at the start of the main operation is terminated as it is. If the sub-side CZ flag is set, the CZ game number display is updated in step S2202. The number of games in the CZ mode is managed by the CZ effect setting process when stopped, but the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 (see the image GP of the number of remaining games, see FIG. 54). , It is configured to be updated at the start of the game. In step S2202, the corresponding remaining game number image GP is read from the storage area of the ROM 182 according to the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the updated remaining game number image GP is displayed. ..

After executing the update process of the CZ game number display, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not a lottery result command indicating a specific combination has been received as a command at the start of this game. When a lottery result command indicating a specific combination is received, in step S2204, as an effect during the CZ mode of this game, a numerical character to be stopped when the first stop ON operation is performed and a numerical character to be stopped when the second stop ON operation is performed. It is set so that the tempai effect (FIG. 55 (a)) in which the character of the number becomes the character of the same number is performed. By performing the tempai effect, it is possible to raise the expectation that a predetermined combination corresponding to the AT mode transition winning will be formed as described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2203 that the lottery result command indicating the specific combination has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result command indicating the special combination has been received. If the lottery result command indicating the special role has not been received and the lottery result of this game is neither a specific role nor a special role, a precursor command is received as a command at the start of this game in step S2206. Determine if it is. As already explained, in the start AT lottery process, when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the precursor command is set to be output, but the precursor command is received during the CZ mode. If you do, it means that you won the AT mode transition lottery of this game. Further, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0, so that the AT mode is started from the next game of this game.

When the precursor command is received in step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2204, and the effect is set so that the above-mentioned tempai effect is performed by the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation. On the other hand, if the precursor command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2207, and the normal tempai effect lottery process is executed. In the normal tempai production lottery process, for example, the lottery is performed so that the tempai production occurs with a probability of about 5% regardless of the lottery result of this game. Then, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery process of the tenpai effect, and if so, the process proceeds to step S2204 so that the tenpai effect is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2208 that the lottery process of the tempai effect is not won, the character of the number to be stopped at the time of the first stop ON operation and the character of the number to be stopped at the time of the second stop ON operation are stopped at step S2209. It is set so that a random effect (FIG. 55 (b)) that is different from the numerical character is performed. It is possible to reduce the expectation that a predetermined combination corresponding to the AT mode transition winning will be formed as described above by performing the loose-eye effect.

After setting in step S2204 to perform the tempai effect in the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation, it is determined in step S2210 whether or not the precursor command is received. If a precursor command has been received and the result of the AT mode transition lottery of this game is the winning result, in step S2211, whether to generate a bomb effect based on the third stop ON operation of this game. Whether or not it is decided by lottery.

As shown in FIG. 57A, the bomb effect is an effect of stopping a numerical character in the right fluctuation region SP3 as a third stop ON effect and displaying a bomb character (bomb image BP). In the bomb effect, after that, after the third stop OFF operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), an explosion effect in which the explosion image EP in which the bomb image BP explodes is displayed is executed, or FIG. 59. As shown in (a), the unexploded ordnance effect in which the unexploded image NP is displayed without the bomb image BP exploding may be executed. When the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the state in which the predetermined combination is not formed in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 is switched to the state in which the predetermined combination is formed. The notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is performed, and the AT winning effect is performed as shown in FIG. 58 (b). On the other hand, when the unexploded ordnance effect is executed as the bomb effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the state in which the predetermined combination is not formed in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 is maintained, and the AT A redisplay effect is performed as a notification that the mode transition lottery has not been won.

Here, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the character of the number in the right fluctuation area SP3, and specifically, is displayed in front of the character of the number in the medium fluctuation area SP2. While overlapping with the character of the number, it is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the character of the number in the right fluctuation area SP3 and also does not overlap with the character of the number in the left fluctuation area SP1. By doing so, the bomb image BP is displayed, which makes it difficult or impossible to grasp the character of the number in the right fluctuation region SP3 that is stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed. Can be suitably avoided.

On the other hand, the explosion image EP (FIG. 57 (b)) is displayed in front of the numerical characters stopped in the variable regions SP1 to SP3 and is displayed so as to overlap the numerical characters. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the explosion image EP is set to be displayed to such an extent that the numerical character cannot be visually recognized. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort when the numerical characters are in a state where a predetermined combination is formed after the explosion.

In the winning bomb effect lottery process in step S2211, it is determined whether or not to generate the bomb effect according to the lottery result of the game. In the present embodiment, for example, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery, for example, the lottery triggered by the chance eye A among the specific roles is more likely to generate the bomb effect than the lottery triggered by the chance eye C. The result is that the explosion effect is more likely to occur. After executing the bomb effect lottery process, it is determined in step S2212 whether or not the bomb effect lottery has been won. It is set so that the character of the same number as the character of the number stopped is stopped and the doublet effect (FIG. 56 (a)) in which a predetermined combination is formed is performed. Then, in step S2214, the AT winning effect (FIG. 56 (b)) is set to be performed based on the third stop OFF operation of the current game, and then the CZ effect setting process at the start of this game is terminated. The AT winning effect is set so that, for example, a state in which a military character raises a sword is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 so as to congratulate him on winning the AT mode transition.

If the explosion effect lottery at the time of winning the AT mode transition in step S2212 is not won, in step S2215, a character with a number different from the number character stopped by the above tempai effect during the third stop ON operation. It is set so that the tempai detachment effect (FIG. 55 (a)) for stopping is performed. Further, even if it is determined in step S2210 that the precursor command has not been received, the character with a number different from the character with the number stopped by the above tempai effect is stopped at the time of the third stop ON operation in step S2216. It is set so that the tempai detachment effect (FIG. 55 (a)) is performed. Further, in the case where the random number effect is performed instead of the tempai effect, after the processing of step S2209 is executed, the random number character is stopped and inserted at the time of the third stop ON operation in step S2217 (FIG. 55). (B)) is set to be performed.

After executing the process of step S2216 or step S2217, the process proceeds to step S2218. In step S2218, it is determined whether or not the special combination flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The special combination flag is a flag set in step S2222 when the special combination is won. Since the negative determination is made in step S2205 this time, it is the case that the special combination flag is not set. In step S2218, the negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S2219.

In step S2219, whether or not to generate a bomb effect is determined by lottery based on the third stop ON operation of this game.

In the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition is not won in step S2219, it is determined whether or not to generate the bomb effect according to the lottery result of the game. For example, a lottery triggered by a specific role is made easier to generate a bomb effect than a lottery triggered by a non-specific role. After executing the bomb effect lottery process, it is determined in step S2220 whether or not the bomb effect lottery has been won, and if not, the start CZ effect setting process ends as it is. If the bomb effect lottery has been won, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation in step S2221, and then the CZ effect setting process at the start of the present operation is terminated.

In this way, according to the lottery result of each game and the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the start, the doublet effect is performed in the variable regions SP1 to SP3 to notify that the AT mode transition lottery is won. Is performed, and the AT mode transition lottery is notified that the player has not won the AT mode transition lottery by performing the doublet effect and the doublet effect.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the game is a special combination, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed, but the second operation mode. If so, the AT mode transition lottery will not be performed. Then, as described above, at the time of winning the special combination, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the start AT lottery process, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the stop AT lottery process. Therefore, although it is possible to determine that the special role has been won at the start of the CZ mode, it is not possible to ascertain whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the time of stop based on the special combination is started in advance as the change display of each change area SP1 to SO3, and at the time of stop. After the AT mode transition lottery is executed, the effect started in advance is set to be modified according to the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S2205 that the lottery result command indicating the special combination has been received, the process of setting the special combination flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2222. Then, in step S2223, a tempai production lottery process for a special role is executed. This tempai effect lottery process is set so that the winning probability is different from the tempai effect lottery process in step S2207. Specifically, when the special role is won, it is neither a special role nor a specific role. It is set so that the tempai effect is more likely to occur, and more specifically, in step S2223, the tempai effect is set to occur with a probability of 30%.

After executing the tempai effect lottery process in step S2223, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the tempai effect lottery has been won, and if so, the process for setting the tempai effect in step S2204. I do. By the way, at the time of winning the special role, since the precursor command is not output in the AT lottery process at the start, even if the tempai production is performed, a negative judgment is made in step S2210, and the process becomes step S2216. It is set so that the command off the command is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2208 that the tempai effect lottery is not won, it is set so that the random effect is performed in step S2209 and step S2217.

After executing the process of step S2216 or step S2217, the process proceeds to step S2218 as described above, and it is determined whether or not the special combination flag is set. Since the special role flag is set this time, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2218, and the process proceeds to step S2221. In step S2221, as described above, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation.

That is, in the special role winning game, the tempai effect is set to be more likely to occur than when the special role is not won, and the bomb effect in which the bomb image BP is displayed at the time of the third stop ON operation always occurs.

<CZ effect setting process when stopped>
Next, the stop CZ effect setting process in step S2105 in the stop effect setting process (FIG. 49) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the above bomb effect is being executed. When the bomb effect is being executed, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the precursor command is received as the current start command or stop command. As described above, the case where the precursor command is received during the CZ mode is the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the case where the precursor command is received as the start command is AT in the start AT lottery process. When the mode transition lottery is won and the precursor command is received as the stop command, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by being operated in the first operation mode when the special combination is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed. If you win. Also in this case, since the number of precursor games is set to 0, the AT mode is started from the game next to the game ending this time.

When the precursor command is received, in step S2303, it is set to perform the explosion effect (FIG. 57 (b)) in which the bomb image BP is switched to the explosion image EP in this bomb effect. Then, in step S2304, the doublet effect (FIG. 58 (a)) is set to be performed when the explosion effect ends, and then in step S2305, the AT winning effect (FIG. 58 (b)) is performed after the doublet effect. )) Is set to be performed, and then the CZ effect setting process at the time of this stop is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor command is not received in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2306, and the unexploded ordnance effect (FIG. 59 (a)) in which the bomb image BP is switched to the unexploded ordnance image NP is performed in this bomb effect. Set to. Then, in step S2307, when the unexploded ordnance effect is completed, it is set so that the originally displayed tempai off-eyes and unexploded ordnance effects are displayed (FIG. 59 (b)).

Whether or not the CZ game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b in step S2308 is 0 after it is determined in step S2308 that the bomb effect is not executed, or after the process of step S2307 is executed. To judge. In the CZ game number counter, the number of games (10) in the CZ mode is input at the start of the CZ mode. If the CZ game number counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game number counter is executed in step S2309, and then the CZ effect setting process at the time of this stop is terminated. In this case, the CZ game number display is updated so that the remaining game number image GP corresponding to the value of the CZ game number counter value subtracted in step S2309 is displayed in step S2202 in the above-mentioned start CZ effect setting process. Perform processing.

When the CZ game number counter is 0 in step S2308, the process of setting the CZ mode end effect to be performed is executed in step S2310, and then the stop-time CZ effect setting process is terminated. As shown in FIG. 50B, the CZ mode end effect is set to notify that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is 0 and the CZ mode has ended. When the unexploded ordnance effect of step S2306 or the out-of-fire redisplay effect of step S2307 is set, the CZ mode end effect is set to be performed after the unexploded ordnance effect or the out-of-fire redisplay effect is performed.

<Direction of special role winning game>
Next, the state of the production of the special role winning game in the CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 60 (a1) shows a case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game to win the AT mode transition lottery, and FIG. 60 (b1) shows the case where the special role is won. In the game, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. As already explained, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the 33rd small winning combination is established and one medal is paid out, while in the special role winning game, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. The first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established and eight medals are paid out.

At ta1, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. Then, the lottery process is performed based on the start operation of the ta1, and when the special combination is won, the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the start AT lottery process executed in the ta1. Further, in the CZ mode, the variation display of the numerical character in each variation region SP1 to SP3 is started based on the start operation of ta1.

When the first stop ON operation is performed in ta2, as shown in FIG. 60 (a2), the numerical character stops in the left fluctuation region SP1. Further, when the second stop ON operation is performed in ta3, as shown in FIG. 60 (a3), the numerical character stops in the medium fluctuation region SP2. The figure shows a case where a tenpai effect lottery process for a special role (step S2220) is won, and in FIG. 60 (a3), a tenpai effect is performed. Then, when the third stop ON operation is performed at ta4, as shown in FIG. 60 (a4), the numerical character stops in the right fluctuation region SP3 so as to be the tempai off effect, and the bomb effect is started. To. These effects of FIGS. 60 (a2) to 60 (a4) are set in the CZ effect setting process at the start, and are set in advance before the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop based on the special combination is performed. Corresponds to the production.

As described above, the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 37) on the main control device 101 side is executed in step S415 in the reel control process (FIG. 22), and is executed after the payout determination process (step S413). That is, the winning result handling process is executed after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped and the medal payout based on the stop is completed.

In this case, after the bomb effect is started based on the third stop ON operation of ta4, when the third stop OFF operation is performed on ta5, the medal payout based on the 33rd small winning combination is started. Then, after the medal payout is completed at ta6, the AT lottery process at the time of stop is executed, and as a result, the precursor command is received and the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect at ta6 (FIG. 60 (a5)). After that, at ta7, the explosion effect is switched to doublet effect (FIG. 60 (a6)), and at ta8, the AT winning effect is executed (FIG. 60 (a7)). In this way, notification (FIG. 60 (a7)) that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the game started in ta1 is performed. In this case, the AT mode is started from the game next to the game.

When the operation is performed in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the start operation performed in tb1 as shown in FIG. 60 (b1). Then, the number character stops in the left fluctuation region SP1 based on the first stop ON operation of tb2 (FIG. 60 (b2)), and the number character stops in the middle fluctuation region SP2 based on the second stop ON operation of tb3. (FIG. 60 (b3)), based on the third stop ON operation of tb4, the numerical character stops in the right fluctuation region SP3, and the bomb effect is started (FIG. 60 (b4)). These effects of FIGS. 60 (b2) to 60 (b4) are also set in the CZ effect setting process at the start, and are set in advance before the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop based on the special combination is performed. It corresponds to the production.

As described above, when the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode, the first small role winning to the sixth small role winning, in which the number of medals paid out is larger than that at the time of the 33rd small role winning, is established and eight medals are established. The payout is made.

Then, after performing the 3rd stop OFF operation at tb5, the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination are won at tb7, which is later than tb6 where the payout of one medal at the time of winning the 33rd small winning combination is completed. Eight medals have been paid out based on. That is, the stop AT lottery process in the winning result handling process is executed at tb7, which is later than tb6, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop can also be grasped by tb7.

In this case, the bomb effect started from tb4 is switched to the unexploded effect at tb7, and then the off-redisplay effect is performed at tb8, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery of this game is the result of the outage. Is notified.

Although detailed explanation by the figure is omitted, in the case of operating in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, if the AT mode transition winning is not achieved in the stop AT lottery process, the ta6 stop CZ effect It is determined in the setting process that the precursor command has not been received. In this case, the bomb effect is switched to the unexploded effect at ta6, and then the off-display effect is displayed at ta7.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the game is a special role, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, one medal can be paid out. While the AT mode transition lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is executed, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the second operation mode, eight cards are more than in the case of the first operation mode. The medal payout may occur, and the AT mode transition lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is not executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode in terms of playability to reduce the decrease in the number of medals held, and it is advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in terms of playability aiming at the transition to AT mode. .. In this way, since the player can select which game to play, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the various needs of the player.

In addition, in the special role winning game, after setting the bomb production corresponding to the special role from the start of the game, according to the result of the AT mode transition lottery performed at the end of the special role winning game. Since the bomb effect is switched between the explosion effect and the unexploded effect, even if the special role has different execution mode and whether or not the processing related to the instruction function is executed depending on the operation mode, the special role is won. It is possible to notify the result of processing related to the instruction function in the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the result notification of the processing related to the instruction function from being carried over to the next game or later, and as a so-called complete notification type notification mode, the attention to the result notification in each game can be dramatically increased. It will be possible.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the AT mode is started from the game next to the game that won the transition lottery, so that the special role is used as an opportunity. Even if the AT mode transition lottery is won, it is possible to start the AT mode from the next game after notifying the AT mode transition winning. Therefore, it is not necessary to delay the start timing of the AT mode due to the game result or the convenience of the notification side, and it is possible to realize smooth game performance while simplifying the processing.

Since the stop AT lottery process is executed after the medal payout is completed, the period from the third stop OFF operation to the stop AT lottery process is the first in the special role winning game. The operation in one operation mode and the operation in the second operation mode in the special winning combination winning game are different. That is, when the bomb effect is started by the third stop ON operation as shown in FIGS. 57 (a1) and 57 (a2), after the third stop OFF operation is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (b2). As shown in FIG. 57 (b1), the period until the explosion effect occurs is the A period (ta5 to ta6 in FIG. 60) until the payout of one medal based on the 33rd small winning combination is completed. On the other hand, when the explosion effect is started by the third stop ON operation, the unexploded effect occurs as shown in FIG. 59 (b1) after the third stop OFF operation is performed as shown in FIG. 59 (b2). The period up to is the B period (tb5 to tb6 in FIG. 60) from the 1st small winning combination to the completion of the payout of 8 medals based on the 6th small winning combination, and the B period is better than the A period. It is set to be long. In this case, the timing at which the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect on the AT mode transition winning side arrives earlier than the timing at which the AT mode transition non-winning side is switched to the unexploded effect. By doing so, when the effect of the AT mode transition winning side is performed, it is possible to secure not only the doublet effect using each variable region SP1 to SP3 but also the time for performing the AT winning effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bomb effect is not limited to the special role winning game, but also the bomb effect lottery process (step S2211) at the time of winning the AT mode transition and the bomb effect lottery process (step S2219) at the time of not winning the AT mode transition. ), The waiting period from the third stop OFF operation to the stop CZ effect setting process in the situation where the bomb effect is being performed is the configuration that can occur even if the player wins. The length varies depending on the lottery result of the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61, the waiting period from the third stop OFF operation in the special combination winning game to the stop CZ effect setting process is 1 in the first operation mode. It is the A period corresponding to the period in which the medals are paid out, and more specifically, it is about 0.5 sec. On the other hand, the above-mentioned waiting period in the special role winning game is a period corresponding to a period in which eight medals are paid out in the second operation mode, and is a period B longer than the period A, and more. Specifically, it is about 4.0 sec.

The waiting period in the watermelon winning game is a period corresponding to a period in which three medals are paid out, a period C longer than the period A and shorter than the period B, and more specifically, about 1.5 sec. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, among the re-game results, the period during which the same number of bets as the number of bets of the game in which the normal rips A to C are won in the re-game process based on the normal rips A to C winning is set. , The period in which the same number of bets as the number of bets of the game in which the chance eyes A to C and the cherries A to C are won in the re-game process based on the chance eyes A to C and the cherry A to C winning is different. The bet period in the rips A to C is usually set to be longer than the bet period in the chance eyes A to C and the cherries A to C. Further, the period of betting by chance eyes A to C and cherries A to C is set to be the same length as the period in which the same number of medals are paid out. In this way, the specific roles such as chance eyes A to C and cherries A to C composed of the replay results give the impression that they are treated the same as the small role results in which medals are paid out like watermelon, and are usually treated. It is possible to give the impression that the result is different from the replay result such as Lips A to C.

Then, the above-mentioned waiting period in the normal rip A to C winning games is a period corresponding to the period in which three bets are made, and is a period D longer than the above-mentioned C period and shorter than the B period in the watermelon winning game. More specifically, it is about 3.0 sec.

In addition, the above-mentioned waiting period in the chance eyes A to C and cherry A to C winning games is a period of the same length as the period in which three medals are paid out even if the period in which three bets are made. , The same length as the above C period in the watermelon winning game, specifically about 1.5 sec.

These periods A to C are all periods in which the bomb effect may shift to the explosion effect, and thus the period required for paying out medals according to the game result and the period required for bet setting in the re-game process. Since the period until the explosion effect is generated is diversified by utilizing the difference in the above, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that the explosion effect will occur.

Then, the explosion effect is most likely to occur in the A period of the first operation mode in the special role winning game, and then the explosion effect is likely to occur in the watermelon winning game, the chance eyes A to C, and the cherry A to C winning game. Next, it is set so that the explosion effect is likely to occur in the D period of the normal rip A to C winning games, and the explosion effect does not occur in the B period of the second operation mode in the special role winning game. On top of that, since the A period is the shortest and the C period, the D period, and the B period are the longest in that order, the explosion effect is expected to occur earlier, but at least until the D period. It is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of the explosion, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the explosion effect.

Furthermore, in relation to the push order bell winning game, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination, eight medals are paid out. , The above waiting period is the B period. In this case, since it is set not to win the AT mode transition lottery when the push order bell is won (FIG. 30), it is not necessary to switch to the AT winning notification side after the B period has elapsed, and in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and a sense of incongruity when trying to force the production.

In addition, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a non-correct operation order that does not correspond to the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination when the push order bell is won, one medal is paid out or a medal is paid out. Is not performed, so the above waiting period is 0 or A period. In other words, even during the A period when one medal is paid out, none of the small role prizes have been established, or the 9th small role prize to the 32nd small role prize have been established instead of the 33rd small role prize. If this is the case, the explosion effect will not occur, so the degree of attention to the stop roll can be increased, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are set in the first operation mode so that the 33rd small winning combination is established. It is possible to encourage them to operate.

<About the number of precursor games>
Next, the effect in the precursor mode set based on the precursor command will be described. The precursor mode is a mode in which, when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the precursor effect suggesting that the transition lottery has been won can be executed in each game, and is set. In a game in which the number of precursor games is 0, it is set to notify that the AT mode transition has been won and that the CZ mode transition has been won.

As already explained, the number of precursor games is the number of precursor games when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process or the stop AT lottery process on the main control device 101 side. It is determined in (step S817, step S1320). As described above, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games.

Here, the number of precursor games in the normal mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 62.

As described above, as the number of precursor games, any one of 0 games to 40 games is set to be selected. In the present embodiment, the number of precursor games that are easy to be selected differs depending on whether the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process or the AT mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. Is set to. In addition, the number of precursor games that are easy to select differs depending on whether the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the stop. Has been done. Furthermore, the number of precursor games that are easy to select differs depending on whether the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process, and the game is stopped. The number of precursor games that are easy to select differs depending on whether the AT mode transition lottery is won in the time AT lottery process or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. ..

Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start, one of 1 game to 5 games and 15 games to 40 games is set as the number of precursor games, but the game is stopped. When the AT mode transition lottery is won in the time AT lottery process, any one of 1 game to 12 games is set as the number of precursor games. Further, when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start, one of 1 game to 32 games is set as the number of precursor games, whereas the CZ mode is set in the AT lottery process at the stop. If the transition lottery is won, any one of 1 to 7 games is set as the number of precursor games.

The case of winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process is only when the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, and the player can use the opportunity to win the transition. There is a high possibility that you have a clear grasp of the special role winning game that has become. On the other hand, in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start, although the specific combination winning is often the trigger, chance eyes A to C and cherries A to C Since is composed of re-game results, no omissions occur, and the presence or absence of omissions does not affect the result of the transition lottery, so the player may miss the specific role winning game that triggered the transition winning. There is also sex. Further, regarding the CZ mode transition lottery, it is difficult to determine in which game the CZ mode transition winning was achieved, because the transition winning can be achieved by the normal rips A to C instead of the specific winning combination. Therefore, by making it easier to select a relatively long number of precursor games in the start AT lottery process that may not be noticed that the transition has been won, the AT mode or CZ mode can be selected from any situation. It is possible to give the impression that it is possible to win the transition, and it is possible to provide a surprise when the notification that the transition has been won is made, and by doing so, the attention of each game in the normal mode can be provided. It is possible to suppress the decrease in degree. On the contrary, it is easy to select a game number shorter than the number of precursor games determined in the stop AT lottery process triggered by the special role in the start AT lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when it is grasped that the transition lottery that is easy to win is executed until the result of winning or losing is notified, so that the game does not become slack.

Further, comparing the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won and the case where the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the precursor game to be set regardless of whether the start AT lottery process or the stop AT lottery process is performed. It is set so that the number of games is likely to be longer when the number is won in the AT mode transition lottery. By doing so, the player who understands that the precursor mode is set from the precursor effect of each game wants the precursor mode to continue for as long as possible, and the player can switch to the AT mode. It is possible to increase the percentage of games that attract attention by using the sense of expectation.

In particular, the number of precursor games set at the time of winning the AT mode transition in the start AT lottery process and the number of precursor games set at the time of winning the CZ mode transition in the start AT lottery process are the same at the time of winning the CZ mode transition. While the number of precursor games up to 32 games is selected, the number of precursor games of 33 games or more can be selected at the time of winning the AT mode transition. By doing so, the player who understands that it is in the precursor mode will pay attention to each effect in the precursor mode while expecting that it will continue for 33 games or more, and will pay attention to each effect. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is not won, the same or similar precursor effect as the effect in the precursor mode is executed, and finally the AT mode transition winner is obtained. A pseudo-precursor mode is set in which notification of the fact that the game has been completed or notification of the winning of the CZ mode transition is not performed.

As the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode, any one of 1 game to 6 games and 10 games to 18 games is set to be selected. In this case, if the situation in which the precursory effect is performed continues for 19 games or more, it is determined that the precursory mode is based on the AT mode transition winning or the CZ mode transition winning. Therefore, the player who understands that the mode is the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode from the precursor effect will want the mode to continue for 19 games or more, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to each game. be.

Then, in the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process in the main control device 101, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number table set as described above, and the information on the number of precursor games is determined. The precursory command including is output to the display control device 81.

Hereinafter, the start time precursor effect setting process, the stop time precursor effect setting process, and the game number management process, which are the processes on the display control device 81 side, will be described.

<Starting precursor effect setting process>
First, the start time precursor effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63. The start-time precursor effect setting process is a process executed in step S2008 in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 48).

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the normal mode. In the case of the CZ mode, the AT mode, or the normal section, the precursor effect setting process at the start of the present is terminated as it is. In the normal mode, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the sub-side precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 183b has a value larger than 0. The sub-side precursor counter is a counter in which a value corresponding to the number of precursor games is input when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, and is decremented by 1 when the game is digested. That is, the process of step S2402 is a process of determining whether or not the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is in progress.

When it is determined that the sub-side precursor counter is 0 and the mode is not in the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the precursor command is received as the command at the start of this time. If the precursor command has not been received, the pseudo precursor lottery process is executed in step S2404. The pseudo-precursor lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to set the above-mentioned pseudo-precursor mode by lottery. In the pseudo-precursor lottery process, a table for pseudo-precursor lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, and a lottery is performed as to whether or not to set the pseudo-precursor mode according to the lottery result of this game. In the table for pseudo-precursor lottery in this embodiment, the result that is less likely to appear as the lottery result of each game is set so that it is easier to win the pseudo-precursor lottery. Is set to make it easier to win the pseudo-precursor lottery. That is, if the result of the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is easy to win and the transition lottery is not won, the pseudo precursor mode is likely to be set.

After executing the pseudo-precursor lottery process, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the pseudo-precursor lottery has been won, and if it is not won, the start-time precursor effect setting process is terminated as it is. When the pseudo precursor lottery is won, the process of setting the pseudo precursor flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2406, and the pseudo precursor game number lottery process is executed in step S2407. In the pseudo-precursor game number lottery process, the game number table for the pseudo-precursor mode (FIG. 62) is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a, and the number of precursor games in the pseudo-precursor mode this time is determined by lottery.

On the other hand, if the precursor command is received in a situation other than the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, it is determined whether or not the received precursor command is triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery. If the command is not a precursor command output when the AT mode transition lottery is won, but is triggered by the CZ mode transition lottery, the various flag storage areas 183a are set in step S2409. The process of setting the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is executed. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the process of setting the sub-side AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S2410. After executing the process of step S2409 or step S2410, in step S2411, the process of grasping the information of the number of precursor games set in the received precursor command is executed.

After executing the pseudo precursor game number lottery process in step S2407, or after executing the process of grasping the precursor game number for the precursor mode in step S2411, the pseudo precursor counter on the above sub-side precursor is executed in step S2412. The process of inputting the value corresponding to the number of precursor games in the mode or precursor mode is executed. By such processing, a positive determination is made in step S2402 of the next game.

After executing the process of step S2412, in step S2413, it is determined whether or not the number of games input in step S2412 is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games (8 games). In the case of 8 games or less, in step S2414, the process of setting the first precursor mode effect as the precursor effect in the present precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is executed, and then the process of setting the precursor effect at the start of the present is terminated. In the first precursor mode production in the present embodiment, continuous production is set over a maximum predetermined game (8 games), and for example, a production in which the main character searches for an enemy character and goes on a journey is set. .. Then, the destination of the main character is determined according to the number of remaining games in the number of precursor games, and notification of whether or not an enemy character is encountered in each game is performed. In a game where the number of precursor games is 0, it is displayed that these or battles are started by encountering enemy characters in precursor mode, and giving up searching without encountering enemy characters in pseudo precursor mode. Is displayed.

When it is determined in step S2413 that the number of precursor games is larger than the predetermined number of games, it is determined in step S2415 whether or not the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set. If the sub-side AT mode winning flag is not set and the mode is the precursor mode triggered by the CZ mode transition winning or the pseudo precursor mode, in step S2416, the precursor effect in the present precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is produced. After executing the process of setting the second precursor mode effect, the precursor effect setting process at the start of the present is terminated. In the second precursor mode production in the present embodiment, continuous production is set for at least a larger number of games than a predetermined game (8 games). For example, the main character prepares for a battle with an enemy character. A production for training is set. Then, the training content of the main character is determined according to the number of remaining games of the precursory games, the state of performing the determined training is displayed, and whether or not the battle with the enemy character is started in each game. Is notified. In a game where the number of precursor games is 0, it is displayed that the battle with the enemy character is started in the precursor mode, and in the pseudo precursor mode, the main character is injured in the training and the battle with the enemy character is performed. The state of giving up is displayed.

When it is determined in step S2415 that the sub-side AT mode winning flag is set, and the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the AT mode transition winning, and the number of precursor games is larger than the predetermined number of games, The process proceeds to step S2417. In step S2417, the third precursor lottery process is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the effect during the precursor mode, in addition to the above-mentioned first precursor mode effect and second precursor mode effect, if selected, it is determined that the AT mode transition is won. Precursor mode production is set. In the three precursor mode productions in the present embodiment, continuous productions are set for at least a larger number of games than a predetermined game (8 games). For example, the main character prepares for a battle with an enemy character. A production is set in which the state of planning a strategy in a small room is displayed. Then, a state in which the main character flashes or worries about the strategy is displayed according to the number of remaining games of the precursory games, and notification is made as to whether or not the battle with the enemy character is started in each game. In a game in which the number of precursor games is 0, a state in which a battle with an enemy character is started is displayed.

In step S2417, it is determined by lottery whether or not to set the above-mentioned third precursor mode effect. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the third precursor lottery process is set so as to be different according to the set value set in the setting process of the winning probability in the main process of the main control device 101, and the setting 6 is the most. The higher the setting, the easier it is for the third precursor mode effect to occur, such as the higher the winning probability and the lowest winning probability in setting 1.

After the third precursor lottery process is executed in step S2417, it is determined in step S2418 whether or not the player has won the third precursor lottery process, and if not, the second precursor lottery process is performed in step S2416. After executing the process of setting the mode effect, the process of setting the precursor effect at the start of the main operation is terminated. On the other hand, when the winner is won in the third precursory lottery process, the process of setting the third precursory mode effect is executed in step S2719, and then the process of setting the precursory effect at the start of the present process is terminated.

As described above, each effect of the precursor mode is set based on the reception of the precursor command, and each effect of the pseudo precursor mode is set by winning the pseudo precursor lottery in a situation other than the precursor mode. Then, in the game started in the situation where the sub-side precursor counter is determined to be larger than 0 in step S2402 and the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is already set, the process proceeds to step S2420 and the pseudo precursor flag is set. By determining whether or not it is set, it is possible to grasp whether it is the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode.

In the pseudo precursor mode, the process proceeds to step S2421 to determine whether or not the precursor command has been received as the command at the start of this game. When the precursor command is received and the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won during the pseudo precursor mode, the pseudo precursor flag is cleared in step S2422, and then the process proceeds to step S2408. In this case, a process (step S2408 to step S2419) for changing the effect content of the pseudo precursor mode to the effect content of the precursor mode is executed.

If it is determined in step S2420 that the mode is not the pseudo precursor mode but the precursor mode, or if the precursor command is not received as the command at the start of this game even in the pseudo precursor mode in step S2421, step S2423 Proceed to, and the process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side precursor counter is executed. Then, in step S2424, a process of setting the precursor effect according to the value of the sub-side precursor counter to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed, and then the precursor effect setting process at the start of the present is completed. do.

<Omen effect setting processing at the time of stop>
Next, the stop sign effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop sign effect setting process is a process executed in step S2114 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 49).

In step S2501, as in step S2401, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal mode, and if it is in the CZ mode or AT mode or in the normal section, the stop sign effect setting process is terminated as it is. In the normal mode, in step S2502, it is determined whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is larger than 0, and it is already grasped whether or not it is the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode. When the sub-side precursor counter is 0, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the precursor command is received as the stop command of this game. If it has not been received, the precursor effect setting process at the time of this stop is terminated as it is. That is, in the stop sign effect setting process, the process for setting the pseudo precursor mode is not provided. In this way, by entrusting the setting of the pseudo precursor mode to the precursor effect setting process at the start, it is possible to eliminate duplication of processing and simplify the processing configuration.

If the precursor command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2504. As already explained, the case where the precursor command is output as the stop command is the case where the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won after being operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game. Is. In this case, in step S2504, whether or not the command is a precursor command based on the AT mode transition winning, that is, the AT mode transition lottery among the processes related to the instruction function by operating in the first operation mode when the special combination is won is won. Determine if this is the case. If the AT mode transition lottery is not won even though the operation is performed in the first operation mode and the CZ mode transition lottery is won among the processes related to the instruction function, the process of setting the sub-side CZ mode winning flag in step S2505 is performed. Run. On the other hand, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the process of setting the sub-side AT mode winning flag is executed in step S2506. After executing the process of step S2505 or step S2506, the process of grasping the number of precursor games is executed in step S2507.

After grasping the number of precursor games, in steps S2508 to S2515, after executing the process of inputting the number of precursor games to the sub-side precursor counter in the same manner as the processes of steps S2512 to S2519 above, the number of precursor games. If is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, the first precursor mode effect is performed, and if it is more than the predetermined number of games, the second precursor mode effect or the third precursor mode effect is performed, and then at the time of this stop. End the precursor effect setting process. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the third precursor lottery process in step S2513 and the winning probability of the third precursor lottery process of step S2417 are set to be different. Specifically, in step S2513. The lower the setting, the easier it is to win the third precursor lottery, and in step S2417, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the third precursor lottery. By doing so, in predicting the set value, it is understood whether the AT mode transition lottery in the start AT lottery process has been won or the AT mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process has been won. The need will arise, and it will be possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the lottery results of each game. Further, by doing so, it is possible to average the occurrence rate of the third precursor mode effect based on the set value by combining the start time and the stop time.

When it is determined in step S2502 that the sub-side precursor counter is larger than 0, it is determined in step S2516 whether or not the pseudo precursor flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S2517 whether or not the precursor command is received as the stop command of this game, and if it is received, the pseudo precursor flag is cleared in step S2518. Then, in steps S2504 to S2515, the process of rewriting from the pseudo precursor mode to the precursor mode is executed. If the pseudo precursor mode is not set in step S2516, or if the precursor command is not received in step S2517, the precursor effect setting process at the time of this stop is terminated as it is.

<Game number management process>
Next, the game number management process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The game number management process is a process executed in step S2115 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 49), and updates the display of the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section in the auxiliary display unit 65, or the number of ceiling games. Executes the process of setting the effect when reaches.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the mode is the normal mode or the CZ mode, and if the mode is the AT mode or the normal section is in progress, the stop time precursor effect setting process is terminated as it is. In the normal mode or the CZ mode, in step S2602, a process of adding 1 to the number of sub-game counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The sub-side game number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games from the transition to the advantageous section to the start of the AT mode, and when the transition to the AT mode occurs or the advantageous section ends. It is a counter that is cleared to 0. In the following step S2603, the update process of the game number display is executed. Specifically, the display of the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section (advantageous section game number image AP, see FIG. 66) displayed in the predetermined area of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to the value of the sub-side game number counter in step S2602. The process of updating the display is executed accordingly.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of ceiling games is set when the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the number of games according to the specified specified number reaches the number of ceiling games, the AT mode transition lottery is performed. The AT mode winning flag is set without (see FIG. 31, AT lottery processing at the start). In the present embodiment, the maximum number of ceiling games is set to 700 games, and the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by digesting at least 700 games (FIG. 66 (a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ceiling counter is subtracted according to the digestion of each game, a number larger than 1 may be subtracted after the subtraction value lottery process (step S1304) is executed. I am doing it. In this subtraction value lottery process, it is particularly easy to select a large subtraction value triggered by a special combination (FIG. 39). However, even in the special winning combination winning game, the subtraction value lottery process is executed if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, but the subtraction value lottery process is not executed if the operation is performed in the second operation mode. However, the ceiling counter in the game is not subtracted.

That is, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), after shifting to the advantageous section at t0, the subtraction value larger than 1 at t1 and t2. Is selected and subtracted from the ceiling counter, and as a result, the ceiling counter may become 0 in less than 700 games of t4 (t3). On the other hand, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), after shifting to the advantageous section at t0, the special role winning such as t1 or t2 is won. The ceiling counter is not subtracted in the game, so that even if the actual number of digestion games is t4, which reaches 700 games, the ceiling counter will not be 0, and the ceiling counter will be 0 at t5, which is later than that. become.

That is, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the AT mode winning flag is not set even if the display of the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section (advantageous section game number image AP) reaches 700, which is the maximum number of ceiling games. There will be cases.

After executing the process of step S2603 in the game number management process, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the subtraction value command is received as the stop command of this game. When the subtraction value command is received, the process of grasping the current subtraction value from the subtraction value command in step S2605 and adding the absolute value of the subtraction value to the sub-side ceiling counter of various counter areas 183b is executed. do. Incidentally, as described above, the case where the subtraction value command is output from the main control device 101 in the special combination winning game is the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and the second operation mode. The subtraction value command is not output when the operation is performed with.

When it is determined in step S2604 that the subtraction value command has not been received, or after the process of step S2605 is executed, p becomes a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games in the sub-side game number counter in step S2606. Determine if it is. Specifically, when the number of ceiling games is set to 700, when the number of sub-game counters updated in step S2602 reaches 700, a positive determination is made in step S2606. If the number of games on the sub side is different from the number of ceiling games, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

As described above, the sub-side game number counter is cleared to 0 when the transition to the AT mode occurs or the advantageous section ends, but a positive judgment is made in step S2606, and the sub-side game number counter becomes the number of ceiling games. In the case of reaching, it means that the game has been executed over the number of ceiling games, but the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred. In this case, in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT mode winning flag or the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set. When any of the winning flags is set, it means that the ceiling counter on the main controller 101 side is set to 0 and the precursor mode is set, or after the CZ mode transition lottery is won. means. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, and the game number management process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2607 and it is determined that the sub-side AT mode winning flag and the sub-side CZ mode winning flag are not set even though the number of ceiling games has been exhausted, the step is taken. Proceeding to S2608, the process of calculating the difference between the number of ceiling games (700) and the sub-side ceiling counter is executed. That is, for example, the number of games for which the number of ceiling games has not been subtracted is grasped by operating in the second operation mode when the special combination is won (see FIG. 66 (c)). This makes it possible to know how many games will reach the ceiling in practice.

After executing the process of step S2608, in step S2609, the process of setting the above-mentioned pseudo precursor flag is executed. Then, in step S2610, a process of inputting the actual number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling grasped in step S2608 is executed in the above-mentioned sub-side precursor counter. That is, in this case, the pseudo precursor mode is set over the actual number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling.

Then, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not the actual number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games (8 games). If the number of games is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the process of setting the precursor effect in the pseudo precursor mode as the first precursor mode effect is executed in step S2612, and then the game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, when the actual number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling is larger than the predetermined number of games, the number of games after executing the process of setting the precursor effect in the pseudo precursor mode this time as the third precursor mode effect. End the management process.

In this case, when the ceiling counter becomes 0 on the main control device 101 side, the AT mode winning flag is set and the precursor command is output. Then, in the above-mentioned start time precursor effect setting process, the process for rewriting the precursor mode from the pseudo precursor mode (step S2420 to step S2422, step S2408 to step S2419) is executed, and the number of precursor games based on reaching the ceiling is exhausted. , The transition to AT mode will occur.

Here, the number of ceiling games in this embodiment is set to 700 games, the probability of winning a special role is about 1/20, and the number of special role winning games is approximately 35 times on average until the number of ceiling games is reached. Will arrive. Then, if the special role winning game is always operated in the second operation mode, the subtraction for 35 times is not performed on average until 700 games are digested, and the actual time until the ceiling game is reached when 700 games are digested. The number of remaining games is 35 games on average.

As shown in FIG. 62, as the number of precursor games when reaching the ceiling, a relatively short number of games of 1 to 5 games is set so as to be easily selected. On the other hand, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the AT mode transition set in the AT lottery process at the start is set so that up to 40 games can be selected.

That is, even if the number of ceiling games is reached and the number of special role winning games is operated in the second operation mode each time, 700 games are reached, and after the pseudo precursor mode is started, the actual ceiling is reached. When the number of precursor games based on reaching the ceiling is set, the number of precursor games is likely to be within 40 games. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily perform the precursory effect including the pseudo precursory mode until the actual ceiling is reached within the range of the precursory effect based on the normal AT mode transition winning, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to make it difficult, and since the need to store dedicated production data is not so high, it is possible to reduce the storage data.

In addition, in the pseudo-precursor mode when the number of ceiling games is reached, the third precursor mode effect, which is determined to be the precursor mode that normally wins the AT mode transition lottery, is set. It is also possible to alleviate the player's disappointment that the AT mode is not started even though the number of ceiling games has been reached, by the effect that the AT mode is normally fixed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first privilege is granted and the process related to the instruction function is executed as the first process, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the process is higher than the first privilege. A special role is provided to execute the process related to the instruction function as a second process that is more disadvantageous than the first process, while the advantageous second privilege is given, and the process related to the instruction function executed in the game in which the special role is won is provided. The notification corresponding to the result of is executed during the game. More specifically, when a special role is won during the CZ mode, the notification corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is executed at the end of the game in which the special role is won. did. By doing so, if the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0, and the AT mode is started from the next game of the transition winning game. It is possible to apply the special role even in a notification-type game, and even if the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is won, the relevant special role will be applied when starting the AT mode from the next game. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the AT mode transition winning is not notified before the start of the AT mode.

In addition, by doing so, even if the AT mode transition is won due to a special role, the AT mode can be started speedily (with the precursor game as the shortest 0 game) as with other results. It becomes possible to suitably apply a special role that can be performed only at the end of the game to the existing game.

When the special combination is won and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition winning is performed with a high probability in the stop AT lottery process, while the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Is set not to win the AT mode transition. In this way, by making the processing related to the instruction function executed according to the operation mode at the time of winning the special role extreme, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special role winning game can be performed more carefully. It becomes possible.

If a special role is won during the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery when the game is operated in the first operation mode is set so that the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 50%. About half of the chances of winning the AT mode transition in the CZ mode are set to be special roles. In other words, in the case of the AT mode transition winning triggered by a special role, if the AT mode transition winning is notified or the AT mode is started after several games even in the CZ mode, the AT is configured. Approximately half of the transitions to the mode may end up in a configuration that has undergone such an extended production. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes possible to speedily perform the process from the AT mode transition lottery to the AT mode transition with respect to the AT mode transition triggered by the special role that is relatively likely to occur, and the game can be further enhanced. It is possible to proceed favorably.

In the AT mode, the push order notification effect is generated when the push order bell is won, so that the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination can be established. It is executed based on the operation of the lever 41. That is, when the push order bell is won in the first game of the AT mode, the push order notification effect is generated as the effect at the start of the first game. Because of this configuration, even in a special role winning game, by notifying the AT mode transition winning in the game, in the configuration where the AT mode is started from the next game, the push order notification effect is produced. Can be configured to notify the AT mode transition winning in advance before the execution of.

In the CZ mode, the winner of the AT mode transition lottery is notified by the effect of whether or not the numerical character is doublet in each game, but in such an effect, the AT mode transition is won. The tempai effect is set as an effect with a high degree of expectation, and the tempai effect is before the end timing of the game, and the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode when the special role is won. It occurs after the first stop operation. By doing so, in notifying the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery at the end of each game in the CZ mode, the first operation is performed depending on whether or not the tempai effect is generated, while having the effect of enlivening it in advance. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of determining whether to operate in the mode or the second operation mode.

The AT mode transition lottery at the time of winning a special role is executed in the stop AT lottery process, and the stop AT lottery process is executed after all the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are completed. .. That is, if the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the special role is to be notified in the game, after all the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are completed and before the betting operation of the next game is performed. It is necessary to perform the notification, and the execution timing of the notification is extremely limited. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the production of each game by instigating the doublet production in advance by the tempai production or the like as described above.

Although the above-mentioned tempai effect is likely to occur when the AT mode transition is won, it can occur even when the AT mode transition is not won. By doing so, even if the tempai effect is executed in a situation where the AT mode transition lottery has not yet been executed in the special role winning game, there is no contradiction when the AT mode transition lottery is not won thereafter. Even so, it is possible to raise expectations that the AT mode transition will be won when the tempai production occurs.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned tempai effect is set so that it is likely to occur not only in the special role winning game but also in the AT mode transition winning in the start AT lottery process. By doing so, it is possible to increase the rate at which the tempai production leads to the AT mode transition winning, and even if the AT mode transition lottery has not yet been executed in the special role winning game, when the tempai production occurs. It is possible to fuel the expectation of.

<Modification 1>
As described above, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the process related to the instruction function is executed as the first process, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the process related to the instruction function is executed in the second process. In the special role executed as the process, in the present embodiment, the first process is set to execute the AT mode transition lottery, and the second process is set not to execute the AT mode transition lottery. Due to such a difference in processing, it is possible to start an effect corresponding to the first processing among the first processing and the second processing without waiting for the result of the first processing. Therefore, in this modification, the effect corresponding to the processing related to the instruction function when the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the timing when it becomes possible to determine that the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special combination winning game. To start.

Specifically, as described above, in the special role winning game, the left reel 32L is stopped first, and the 9th "BAR" symbol is reached from the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage. The first operation mode is the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing when the middle reel reaches the middle stage, and even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first or the left reel 32L is stopped first. When the operation is stopped at a timing outside the above range, the second operation mode is used (FIG. 24). In this case, it can be said that it is possible to determine whether or not the first operation mode is performed when the first stop ON operation is performed in the special combination winning game. Therefore, in the modified example, when the first stop ON operation is performed, the notification for the AT mode transition lottery executed based on the first operation mode is started.

FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing a first stop ON time effect setting process in this modification. The first stop ON time effect setting process is a process executed as one process of each stop operation time effect setting process (step S1708) in the effect setting process (FIG. 47) of the display control device 81, and is the first stop ON operation. Is a process executed when a command corresponding to the execution of is received from the main control device 101.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the game being executed is a special combination winning game. In the case of a special role winning game, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not it is the first operation mode. That is, the first stop ON operation executed this time stops the left reel 32L first, and the 9th "BAR" symbol starts from the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage. It is determined whether or not the stop operation was performed at the timing of reaching the middle stage.

In the case of the first operation mode, it is confirmed in step S2703 whether or not the current game is a game in the CZ mode by determining whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set. In the case of a game in the CZ mode, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not the effect set in this game is a random effect. If the game is not won in the tempai effect lottery process (step S2223) executed at the start of the special role winning game and a loose eye effect is set instead of the tempai effect, the process proceeds to step S2705 and the set random eye is set. After executing the process of changing the effect to the tempai off-eye effect, the effect setting process at the time of the first stop ON is terminated.

In this case, the character of the number stopped in the middle fluctuation area SP2 is made to be the same as the character of the number of the left fluctuation area SP1 stopped this time, and the loose-eye effect is corrected to the tempai off-eye effect. good. Then, when the left fluctuation region SP1 and the right fluctuation region SP3 are set to have the same number character in the set variation effect, the number character to be stopped in the middle fluctuation region SP2 is left fluctuation. Correct the character of the number stopped in the area SP1 to be the same as the character of the number stopped in the right fluctuation area SP3, and modify the character of the number scheduled to be stopped in the right fluctuation area SP3 to be different from the character of the number stopped in the left fluctuation area SP1. You should try to do it. If a negative determination is made in steps S2701 to S2704, the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated as it is.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), even when the special combination winning game in the CZ mode is set to produce a random number, if the first stop ON operation corresponds to the first operation mode. , As shown in FIG. 67 (c1), the numerical character that stops in the middle fluctuation region SP2 based on the next second stop ON operation becomes the same as the numerical character in the left fluctuation region SP that has already been stopped. Then, when the second stop is turned on, the tempai effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to raise the expectation that the doublet effect is executed in this game and the notification that the AT mode transition is won is performed, and the degree of attention of the player can be suitably increased. However, even in this case as well, when the third stop is turned on, the doublet effect is executed instead of the doublet effect, and then the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified via the bomb effect.

On the other hand, when the first stop ON operation does not correspond to the first operation mode but corresponds to the second operation mode, it is stopped in the medium fluctuation region SP2 as shown in FIG. 67 (c2). Since the numerical character is not modified, the random stitches are executed as they are.

By doing so, even if the special role has different processing contents related to the instruction function depending on the operation mode, it is possible to start the production corresponding to the processing related to the instruction function before the stop operation is completed. It will be possible.

In particular, even if the above is performed, since the doublet effect is only corrected to the doublet effect, if the AT mode transition lottery in the subsequent stop AT lottery process results in a non-winning result. Even if there is, the doublet effect does not occur even though the AT mode transition lottery is not won. Therefore, as long as there is no contradiction in the production, it is possible to start the production corresponding to the AT mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process before the execution of the transition lottery.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery is won in the game may not be performed. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a start AT lottery process in this modification.

In this modification, the processing when it is determined in step S2809 that the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode is different from the processing in the above embodiment, and other processing (steps S2801 to S2820). Is the same as the corresponding process (steps S801 to S820).

That is, when it is determined in step S2809 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode (step S2808: YES, step S2809: YES), the CZ game counter is larger than the predetermined number (3) in step S2821. , It is determined whether or not the number of remaining games in the CZ mode remains more than a predetermined number. If more than a predetermined number remains, the delayed lottery process is executed in step S2822. The delayed lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to prevent notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the game when the AT mode transition lottery is won. For example, the winning probability of the delayed lottery may be different depending on the lottery result as the trigger for winning the AT mode transition, and the chance eye A is easier to win the delayed lottery than the chance eye C. In addition, the case where the AT mode transition winning is triggered by the lottery result with a high appearance rate of each game may be configured to be easier to win the delayed lottery than the case where the lottery result with a low appearance rate is triggered. Further, the configuration may be such that the larger the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the delayed lottery.

After executing the delayed lottery process in step S2822, it is determined in step S2823 whether or not the delayed lottery has been won. If the user has won, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S2824, the process of setting the delay flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S2825, and then the AT at the start of the present operation. The lottery process is completed. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is less than or equal to a predetermined number in step S2821, or if it is determined in step S2823 that the delayed lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2810 and the CZ mode is terminated. , 0 The process for setting the precursor mode of the game is executed, and then the AT lottery process at the start is ended.

In other words, by winning the above delayed lottery, the AT mode winning flag is set, but the CZ mode is not terminated, it is not set to the precursor mode of 0 game, and the precursor command corresponding to it is not output. On the display control device 81 side, the AT winning notification is not executed in this game, and the effect in the CZ mode is continuously executed.

However, as described above, even when the CZ mode is not terminated, since the AT mode winning flag is set, affirmative determination is made in step S606 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 28) of the next game. , The continuation determination process and the AT addition process are executed instead of the AT lottery process at the start. However, since the AT mode has not been started, in the continuation determination process (FIG. 32), only a negative determination is made in step S901.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the AT addition process in this modification.

Steps S291 to S2910 are the same as the processes of steps S1001 to S1010. That is, even before the start of the AT mode, since the AT mode transition lottery has already been won, the additional lottery for the AT mode set is performed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by winning the delayed lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S2905, or after the process of step S2908 or step S2910 is executed, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the above delay flag is set. If the delay flag is not set, the AT addition process is terminated as it is.

If the delay flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode, but the precursor command has not been output yet, the lottery result of this game is the special role winning in step S2912. Judge whether or not. If the special combination is won, the process for setting the precursor mode is executed in steps S2913 to S2916. That is, in step S2913, 0 is input to the precursor counter, and in step S2913, the precursor flag is set. Then, in step S2915, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and a precursor command including information that the number of precursor games is 0 is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After that, the process of clearing the delay flag is executed in step S2916, and then the process for adding the AT is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2912 that the special combination is not won, it is determined in step S2917 whether or not the CZ game counter is 1. The case where the CZ game counter is 1 is the case where the CZ game counter is set to 0 in the processing for the number of CZ games when the game to be started this time ends, and the CZ mode ends. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2913 to execute the process of setting the precursor mode in which the number of precursor games is 0. If the CZ game counter is not 0 in step S2917, the AT addition process is terminated as it is.

That is, if the AT mode transition is won in the start AT lottery process in the CZ mode, by winning the delayed lottery, the notification that the AT mode transition is won is not performed in this game. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (a1), when the AT mode transition lottery is won, for example, when the watermelon is won, if the delayed lottery is won, the precursor command is not output in this game. Therefore, FIG. 70. As shown in (a2), as the effect during the CZ mode of this game, not the doublet effect but the tempai off-eye effect is executed.

After that, if the special role is won before the end of the CZ mode this time (FIG. 70 (b1)), the doublet effect is executed in the game and the notification that the AT mode transition lottery is won is given (Fig. 70 (b1)). FIG. 70 (b2)). In this case, the doublet effect is set in the start CZ effect setting process based on the precursor command output at the start of this game. Therefore, the doublet effect may be executed as it is without going through the bomb effect (step S2213 and step S2214), or the doublet effect may be executed through the bomb effect (step S2215, step S2221, etc.). Step S2303 to step S2305). By doing so, in the special role winning game, not only the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won after the final stop, but also the notification that the winning has been won may be given before that. In the special role winning game, it becomes possible to pay attention to the production even before the final stop.

Moreover, when the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the special role winning game is notified through the winning of the delayed lottery, in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. 70 (b1), Regardless of which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is used, the notification of winning is performed. By doing so, although the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the second operation mode, or AT as if in the second operation mode. It is also possible to give the impression that a mode transition lottery is being performed. For example, even a player who mistakenly operates in the second operation mode can watch the notification with hope. Therefore, even a player who does not understand that the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the second operation mode can fully enjoy the special role winning game.

Further, as in the above configuration, in the special role winning game, it is possible to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won even in the second operation mode, so that the first small winning combination is won in the second operation mode. ~ If the 6th small role prize is established, it will be possible to give the impression that you won the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the push order bell, and you can also increase the attention when you win the push order bell. It is possible. In this case, in the special role winning game, the 1st small role winning to the 6th small winning combination will occur, but the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination will not occur, so that the stop switches 42 to 44 will occur when the push order bell is won. It is also possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the operation order of is matched with the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination. By doing so, even before the transition to the AT mode, it is possible to give high interest to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell is won, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

In addition, in order to enhance such an effect, when the delay flag is set at the time of winning the special combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is played together with the CZ mode effect this time as shown in FIG. 70 (c). The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be used to perform an effect that is expected by a person. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 is associated with the three stop switches 42 to 44 to display three characters with a question mark. Then, every time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the question mark corresponding to the operated stop switches 42 to 44 is marked with a mark indicating the correct answer (for example, a circle) in order to notify that the operation order is matched. The effect of switching to the character) is performed. In this case, the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 of the three question marks should be operated first in order to establish the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination when the special combination is won. It is advisable to also notify the fact. By doing so, it is because the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination are successfully established that the AT mode transition lottery is won and the doublet effect (Fig. 70 (b2)) is executed. It is possible to give a stronger impression.

Further, in the push order bell winning game, the push order prediction effect that causes the player to predict the above operation order may be executed. However, in the push order bell winning game, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is not won even in the CZ mode (FIG. 30), so that the operation order matches the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination. Even if it is done, doublet production will not occur.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the above-mentioned push order prediction effect is generated in the push order bell winning game, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination. If the operation order corresponds to the winning, the correct answer effect that the pushing order was the correct answer is performed in the pushing order prediction production, and the operation order does not correspond to the 1st small winning combination prize to the 6th small winning combination winning. In this case, the configuration is such that an incorrect answer effect indicating that the push order was incorrect in the push order prediction effect is performed. Then, even if the correct answer is produced in the push order bell winning game, the AT mode won not be won. It is possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery is won by a part of the correct answer to the operation order of the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination at the time of winning the bell.

In the special role winning game, the characters of the middle and right Hatena corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 may be displayed as "1" or the like in the push order prediction effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the operation in the first operation mode and encourage the operation in the second operation mode.

In addition, even in the push order bell winning game, the configuration may be such that the CZ mode transition lottery can be won. By doing so, in addition to the 1st small role winning to the 6th small role winning at the time of the special role, the AT mode transition lottery can be won at the time of winning the push order bell, but the 1st small role winning to the 6th It is possible to give the impression that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if you answer correctly in the operation order of the small winning combination, and even the push order bell has different processing contents related to the instruction function depending on the operation mode. It is also possible to give the impression that it is a kind of. Therefore, it can be very useful in improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if the push order bell is won in the situation where the delay flag is set, the push order prediction effect is performed, and if the operation order of the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is correct, the correct answer effect is performed. At the same time, it may be configured to generate doublet effect to notify the AT mode transition winning. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the correct answer effect and doublet effect are generated as described above in a part of the case where the push order bell is won in the situation where the delay flag is set (when the predetermined lottery is won). ..

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the AT mode transition lottery is won by utilizing the fact that the stop result when operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game is partially common to the stop result in other lottery results. The notification to that effect is executed before the operation is completed.

FIG. 71 (a) is a flowchart showing a first stop ON time effect setting process in this modification.

In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is cherries A to C. In the following step S3002, the stop rolls stopped based on the first stop ON operation this time are grasped, and it is determined whether or not the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. As described above, when the cherries A to C are won, the 10th re-game winning flag and the 12th re-game winning flag are set (see FIG. 20 etc.), and the 10th re-game symbol and the 12th re-game of the left reel 32L are set. The game symbol is a "BAR" symbol (see FIG. 10). On the other hand, in the game in which the cherries A to C are won, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the left reel 32L, the left reel 32L is placed in the middle stage. 11 One of the "red 7" symbol, the "red shell" symbol, and the "white shell" symbol, which are the re-game symbols, stops.

In step S3002, the first stop ON operation corresponds to the left reel 32L, and the stop result corresponds to the 10th re-game prize or the 12th re-game prize, and the 11th re-game. Judge that it does not correspond to the winning. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the sub-side CZ flag is set in step S3003, and it is determined whether or not the game started this time is in the CZ mode. When in the CZ mode, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is received as a command at the start of this game. When the precursor command is received, it means that the AT mode transition lottery has been won with the cherries A to C this time as an opportunity.

When the precursor command is received, in step S3005, after controlling so that the confirmation effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 based on the first stop ON operation, when the first stop is ON. End the effect setting process. The final effect is an effect of notifying that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a numerical value is displayed in the left fluctuation region SP1 in correspondence with the stop of the first reel. The character is stopped, and the image corresponding to the final effect is displayed in the medium fluctuation region SP2 and the right fluctuation region SP3, which are still changing. In the background of the image corresponding to the final effect (medium fluctuation region SP2 and right fluctuation region SP3), characters having the same number as the number character stopped in the left fluctuation region SP1 are present in the middle fluctuation region SP2 and the right. A stop notice image (an image in which a numerical character is slightly displayed) for notifying the stop in the variable region SP3 is displayed. By doing so, when the 1st reel is stopped, the AT mode transition lottery is won before the 2nd reel and the 3rd reel are stopped (AT winning production is performed in this game). That) can be grasped by the player.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S3001 to S3004, the first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated as it is.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c1), the case where the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L is the case where the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped and the tenth replay winning is established (FIG. 71). (C2)) and the case where the 12th re-game prize is established (FIG. 71 (c3)), and the 33rd small winning combination prize may be established (FIG. 71 (c4)).

That is, the case where the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L includes the stop result when the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the special combination is won. Therefore, when the AT mode transition lottery based on cherries A to C is won, a definite effect is generated when the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage, so that the AT after the stop is executed based on the special combination winning. It is also possible to give the player the impression that the result of the mode transition lottery is notified in advance. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the effect at the time of the stop operation.

In addition, the above modification 3 is applied to the modification 2, the special combination is won in the situation where the delay flag is set, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel 32L based on the first stop ON operation. At that point, the above-mentioned final effect may be generated. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the final effect when the "BAR" stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. Then, even if it becomes possible to determine whether the role is a special role or the cherries A to C by the subsequent stop operation, the final effect is not only triggered by the cherries A to C but also by the special role. Since it is possible to give the impression that the special role is also generated, it is possible to easily associate the special role winning with the time when the final effect is generated. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention at the time of winning a special role.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process is specified before the execution timing of the stop AT lottery process, and the production of the game is determined based on the specific result.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a part of the start AT lottery process in this modification. As described above, the AT lottery process at the start is a process executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and although it is possible to determine whether or not the special combination has been won, in the first operation mode in the game. It is not possible to determine whether it is operated or operated in the second operation mode.

After determining that the ceiling counter is not 0 in step S801 in the start AT lottery process, the process of acquiring the AT lottery random number is executed in step S3101. Then, in step S3102, a process of grasping the lottery result of the game is executed. The processing of these steps S3101 and S3102 is the same as the processing of the above steps S802 and S803.

In the following step S3103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special winning combination based on the processing result of step S3102. If the special combination is won, the preliminary determination process is executed in step S3104. When it is determined in step S3103 that the special combination is not won, or after the preliminary determination process is executed in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S804, and the AT mode transition lottery at the start is executed.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the pre-determination process of step S3104. The pre-determination process is a process for specifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process before the execution timing of the stop AT lottery process.

That is, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, the process of acquiring the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the time of stop is executed in step S3202, and if the CZ mode flag is set, the CZ at the time of stop is executed in step S3203. The process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table is executed. These lottery tables are as shown in FIG.

After acquiring any of the lottery tables, in step S3204, the AT mode transition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game is referred to as the above lottery table. , Is executed from the AT lottery random number acquired in step S3101. That is, even in the stop AT lottery process (FIG. 38), the AT mode transition lottery is executed using the same lottery table and the AT lottery random number acquired based on the start operation. The AT mode transition lottery executed in S3204 and the AT mode transition lottery (step S1310) executed in the stop AT lottery process have the same result, and in the normal mode, there is a 10% probability of winning the AT mode transition. , If it is CZ mode, there is a 50% chance that the AT mode transition will be won.

Further, in the present embodiment, in step S3205, the AT mode transition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special combination winning game is transferred to the above lottery table and step S3101. It is executed from the AT lottery random number obtained in the above. In the stopped AT lottery process (FIG. 38) in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, but the operation is tentatively performed in the second operation mode. In this case, if the AT mode transition lottery is executed, the AT mode transition is performed using the same lottery table and the AT lottery random number acquired based on the start operation in the stop AT lottery process. Since the lottery is executed, the AT mode transition lottery executed in step S3205 and the AT mode transition lottery executed in the stopped AT lottery process (step S1310) have the same result. In the present embodiment, the AT mode transition is won with a 0% probability in the normal mode, and the AT mode transition is won with a 0% probability in the CZ mode. In any mode, the AT mode is won. Do not win the transition lottery.

After executing the processes of step S3204 and step S3205, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the process result of step S3204 is the AT mode transition winning, and if it is the AT mode transition winning, the process is set to step S3207. The process of setting the first operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The first operation winning notice command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in this special role winning game.

When a negative determination is made in step S3206 or after the processing of step S3207 is executed, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not the processing result of step S3205 is the AT mode transition winning, and the AT mode transition winning is achieved. In step S3209, a process of setting the second operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The second operation winning notice command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the operation is performed in the second operation mode in this special role winning game. If a negative determination is made in step S3208, or after the process of step S3209 is executed, the pre-determination process ends.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the start CZ effect setting process in this modification.

In the start CZ effect setting process in this modification, the process at the time of winning the special combination (step S3305: YES) is different, and the other processes (steps S3301 to S3321) are the same as the processes of steps S2201 to S2221. Is.

Specifically, in the game in which the special role is won during the CZ mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, and the process proceeds to step S3322. In step S3322, a process of setting a special combination flag is executed. Then, in step S3323, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first operation winning notice command or second operation winning notice command has been received. If any one of these winning notice commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S3304, and the effect is set so that the tempai effect is executed.

That is, if it is specified in advance by the pre-judgment process that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the operation is performed in any of the operation modes, the start CZ effect setting process notifies that the AT mode transition is won. Tempai production, which is highly expected to be done, will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to start the production corresponding to the result of the stopped AT lottery process without waiting for the result of the stopped AT lottery process.

However, as described above, when the special role is won, the precursor command is not output for the AT lottery at the start, so a negative judgment is made in step S3310, and it is set so that the tempai off-eye effect is performed. To. Further, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command has not been received, even if the lottery is won through the tempai production lottery process for the special role in step S3324, the tempai is performed in step S3304. It is set so that the effect is performed, and then the tempai off-eye effect is set.

That is, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, the tempai effect is executed without going through the tempai effect lottery process, and as a result, these winning notice commands are executed. When the command effect is executed, the ratio leading to the notification that the AT mode transition is won increases, including the case where the command is not received, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the command effect.

In particular, in this modification, whether or not the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received can be predicted from the presence or absence of the tempai effect, and the presence or absence of the tempai effect is determined. It is determined by the second stop ON operation. That is, the case where the tempai effect occurs is the timing after it has already been determined which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is to be performed. With such a configuration, the act of changing the operation mode by the effect generated when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received is suppressed, and the game that knows the generated effect. It is possible to prevent an event that is advantageous only to the person. Therefore, the fairness of the game is guaranteed.

That is, for example, when the first operation winning notice command is received, a special effect (for example, the sound effect at the time of lever operation is different from the normal time) at the timing before the first stop ON operation is performed. If a special sound effect is generated), it is possible to know in advance that the AT mode transition will be won by operating in the first operation mode, so that the interest of the game will be improved. It is preferable to increase the sound effect. However, with such a configuration, in a game in which the above-mentioned special effect does not occur, even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition is not won. Therefore, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. It is preferable for the player to receive more medals paid out. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to generate a special effect corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process before the operation in order to improve the interest of the game, but not to ensure the fairness of the game. In this modification, as described above, the notification corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process is performed after the branch between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, so that the notification is performed while ensuring fairness. It is possible to expect the above-mentioned effect.

By the way, when the configuration is such that a special effect corresponding to the result of the pre-judgment process is executed before the operation as described above, the special effect is not always generated when the first operation winning notice command is received. , Even if the configuration is such that a special effect may not occur when the first operation winning notice command is received, it is better to operate in the second operation mode even if the special effect does not occur. It will not be confirmed. That is, in order to perform an effect corresponding to the result of the prior determination process, it is possible to prevent the determination that the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode from the effect. Regardless of the result of the determination process, it can be motivated to operate in the first operation mode, and it is possible to suitably guarantee the fairness of the game.

When the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, a special effect different from the tempai effect may be executed. As the special effect, for example, the final effect shown in FIG. 71 (b) may be applied. Further, it is preferable to make the sound effect at the time of tempai production a special sound effect that does not occur or does not easily occur in the normal time, or to make a character that does not appear or does not appear in the normal time appear. By doing so, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the operation mode at the time of winning the special combination, and in particular, it is set so that the AT mode transition winning is not performed in the second operation mode as in the above embodiment. In the configuration described above, it is assumed that the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and by executing the above special effect, it becomes possible to grasp in advance that the AT mode transition winning will be achieved. It is possible to realize a novel playability such as.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the playability using the above-mentioned pre-determination process will be described. Specifically, in this modification, when it is specified in the pre-judgment process that the AT mode transition lottery is won by operating in the first operation mode when the special combination is won, the first operation is won as described above. If the special combination is configured to output a notice command and the first operation winning notice command is not received, the player is operated in the second operation mode to win the first small combination to the sixth small. Execute a specific notification effect to establish a winning combination. The mode for executing the specific notification effect is referred to as a navigation mode in the following description.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the navigation mode processing in this modification. The navigation mode process is a process executed as one process (step S2012) in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 48) on the display control device 81 side.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has occurred in the game started this time. When the transition to the advantageous section occurs, in step S3402, the navigation mode lottery for whether or not to shift to the above navigation mode is executed. In this modification, the winning probability of the navigation mode lottery is set to be different according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. Specifically, the higher the setting, the higher the ball output rate, the better the navigation. It is set so that it is easy to win the mode lottery.

After executing the navigation mode lottery in step S3402, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the navigation mode lottery has been won. When the navigation mode lottery is won, the process of setting the navigation mode flag in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed in step S3404.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401 or step S3403, or after the process of step S3404 is executed, it is determined in step S3405 whether or not the game to be started this time shifts to the AT mode. If the game to be started this time is an AT mode transition game, the process for clearing the navigation mode flag is executed in step S3406, and then the process for this navigation mode is terminated. If the game is not an AT mode transition game in step S3405, the processing for this navigation mode is terminated as it is.

That is, in this modification, if the navigation mode lottery executed at the transition of the advantageous section is won, the navigation mode is set, and the transition to the AT mode occurs, so that the navigation mode ends. Further, in this modification, since the navigation mode is not terminated at the end of the advantageous section, the navigation mode is set even if the advantageous section is terminated without shifting to the AT mode. It will be possible to continue and enjoy the benefits of the navigation mode until the transition to the AT mode occurs.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a specific notification process in this modification. The specific notification process is also a process executed as one process (step S2012) in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 48) on the display control device 81 side.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating a special combination has been received as the command at the start of this time. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S3501 and the lottery result of this game is a special role, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first operation winning notice command has been received.

As described above, the case where the first operation winning notice command is received is a special role winning game, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won. If it is specified in advance to do so. If the first operation winning notice command has not been received, that is, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode when the special combination is won, the above step S3503 is performed. Judges whether or not the navigation mode flag of is set. When the navigation mode flag is set, in step S3504, after executing the process of setting the specific notification effect to be executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as the effect at the start of this game, This specific notification process is terminated. That is, the above-mentioned specific notification effect is an effect that is executed as a start effect and is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

If the first operation winning notice command is received in step S3502, or if the navigation mode flag is not set in step S3503, the specific notification process is terminated as it is without setting the specific notification effect. do.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the game is not a special role winning game, the process proceeds to step S3505, a lottery result command indicating a special role is received, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special role winning. do.

Here, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the thirteenth replay is added as a winning mode, the left reel 32L "replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M "replay" symbol, and the right. When the "bell" symbol on the reel 32R stops at the effective line, the 13th re-game prize is set to be established. The above-mentioned special role is a role that enables the 13th re-game winning, and has a lower probability (specifically, about 1/5000) than the result that triggers other AT winnings such as a special role in a 3-bet game. Probability) to win. Further, in the start AT mode transition lottery table and the start CZ AT mode transition lottery table in the start AT lottery process in this modification, the above special role has a 100% probability of winning the AT mode transition. Is set to.

If it is determined in step S3505 that the lottery result of this game is a special winning combination, it is determined in step S3506 whether or not a precursor command is received as the command at the start of this time. When the precursor command is received, it means that the AT mode transition lottery based on the special combination is won, and it means that the special combination is won during the normal mode or the CZ mode instead of the AT mode. When the precursor command is received, the process proceeds to step S3504, the process for performing the specific notification effect is executed, and then the specific notification process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3505 or step S3506, the specific notification process is terminated as it is.

In the specific notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays three characters with the “red 7” symbol in an aligned manner, and displays the characters “aim”. , A voice such as "Aim" is output from the speaker 64, and an effect is set to notify each reel 32L, 32M, 32R that the situation should be aimed at the "Red 7" symbol.

Here, when the 13th re-game prize is established, when each stop switch 42 to 44 is operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 77 (b1), the "red 7" symbol is on the lower line L3. Can stop all together. On the other hand, in the special role winning game, the operation mode aiming at the "Red 7" symbol is not included in the range of the first operation mode (FIG. 24), and the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L. However, the 33rd small winning combination is not established, and the 1st small winning combination is established.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 77 (b2), the stop result of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M when the first small winning combination is established aiming at the "red 7" symbol is at the time of the 13th re-game winning. At the time when the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, it is possible to determine whether the first small winning combination winning or the thirteenth replay winning is established. Can not.

That is, in the case where the specific notification effect for notifying that the situation should be aimed at the "Red 7" symbol is executed, the player does not win the AT mode transition lottery in the special role winning game, so that is the second operation mode. It is not possible to determine whether the operation is prompted or the 13th re-game winning, which is the winning of the AT mode transition lottery. By doing so, in the playability aiming at the AT mode transition winning, when the specific notification effect is executed, the AT mode transition non-winning at the time of winning the special role will not be confirmed, and the specific notification effect will be performed. And based on that, the enjoyment of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 can be improved.

The benefits of the navigation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (d).

In the situation where the navigation mode is not set, the special notification effect does not occur in the special role winning game, so the stop switches 42 to 44 should be operated in the first operation mode in order to receive the AT mode transition lottery. Yes, in this case, as described above, the 33rd small winning combination prize will be established. In this way, when the game is always played in the first operation mode, it is expected that the number of medals will be reduced by about 1.37 per game, and about 36.40 games can be consumed per 50 medals. On the other hand, if the game is always operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, a decrease of about 1.02 is expected per game, and about 48.84 games can be consumed per 50 medals. The number of games that can be digested with the same number of games is larger when the game is operated in the second operation mode than when the game is operated in the first operation mode. However, as described above, by using the second operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery cannot be received and the ceiling counter is not subtracted. Therefore, in terms of playability aiming at the AT mode transition. , The operation in the first operation mode is more advantageous for the player than the operation in the second operation mode.

If the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, about half will be the AT mode transition winning, and in the navigation mode, the specific notification effect will always occur when the AT mode transition winning is achieved. Half will be operated in the first operation mode and half will be operated in the second operation mode. In this case, a decrease of about 1.20 medals per game can be expected, and about 41.71 games can be consumed per 50 medals. Therefore, although the number of games that can be digested with the same number of cards is smaller than that of the case of always operating in the second operation mode, the number of games that can be digested with the same number of cards is larger than that of the case of always operating in the first operation mode. , It becomes possible to efficiently receive the AT mode transition lottery. That is, in the game playability aiming at the AT mode transition lottery, the game in the navigation mode is more advantageous than the case where the game is always operated in the first operation mode. By doing so, it becomes possible to diversify the game in the configuration using the special role.

Here, as described above, in the stop AT mode transition lottery, at least when the special combination is won, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the higher the winning probability of the navigation mode lottery, the easier it is to win. By doing so, it is possible to make the number of games (base) per unit medal different according to the set value without setting a difference in the transition rate of the AT mode.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the special role winning game in the AT mode will be described.

In the above embodiment, among the processes related to the instruction function triggered by the special combination, the additional lottery in the AT mode is the same for the case where the operation is performed in the first operation mode and the case where the operation is performed in the second operation mode. The processing is performed, and specifically, even in the special role winning game, the additional lottery is executed by the AT addition processing executed at the start, as in the case of other lottery results. In this modification, this is changed, and the content of the additional lottery in the AT mode is different depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the process for the number of AT games in this modification. As described above, the process for the number of AT games is a process executed in step S1211 of the winning result corresponding process (step S415) executed after the payout determination process in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

In this modification, first, in step S3601, the AT addition process at the time of stop is executed. After that, in step S1601, the subtraction process of the AT game number counter is executed, and the number of games in the AT mode is managed.

FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop AT addition process in step S3601.

The AT addition process at the time of stop is basically the same process as the AT addition process (FIG. 33) executed at the start of the above, and in the AT addition process at the stop, the additional lottery random number used for the additional lottery. In addition to the fact that the process of acquiring the game is not performed, the process of grasping the operation mode of the game this time is different from the additional lottery table used in the additional lottery. That is, in this modification, the operation mode of the current game is grasped in step S3611, and the subsequent processes of steps S3612 to S3620 are the same as the processes of steps S1002 to S1010, and are acquired in step S3613. The additional lottery table to be added is different from the additional lottery table acquired in step S1003.

Regarding the additional lottery table, specifically, in the AT additional lottery process executed at the start in this modification (hereinafter, referred to as the AT additional lottery process at the start to distinguish it from the one at the stop), FIG. 79. As shown in, the additional lottery based on the special role is set to be non-winning. On the other hand, in the additional lottery table acquired in step S3613 in the above-mentioned stop AT addition process, if the game is operated in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, the additional lottery is won with a probability of 30%. However, when it is operated in the second operation mode, it is set not to win the additional lottery.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT addition process at the start in this modification. This process is a modified example of the AT addition scribe in step S609 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 28).

The processing of step S3701 and step S3702 is the same as the processing of step S1001 and step S1002, and the additional lottery random number is acquired to grasp the lottery result of this game. In the following step S3703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special combination winning, and if it is a special combination winning, the addition pre-determination process is executed in step S3704. When it is determined in step S3703 that the special combination is not won, or after the process of step S3704 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the additional lottery process at the start is executed. As described above, in the special role winning game, it is set not to win in the additional lottery process at the start. In the special role winning game, the additional lottery at the start may not be performed.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the addition pre-determination process of step S3704.

In step S3801, a process of acquiring the AT addition lottery table at the time of stop is executed. The lottery table acquired in step S3801 is the same lottery table as the lottery table acquired in step S3613. In the following step S3802, the AT additional lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game is obtained from the above lottery table and the additional lottery random numbers acquired in step S3701. Run. That is, even in the stop AT additional lottery process (FIG. 78 (b)), the AT additional lottery is executed using the same lottery table and the additional lottery random number acquired based on the start operation. Therefore, the AT additional lottery executed in step S3802 and the AT additional lottery executed in the stop AT additional lottery process (step S3614) have the same result, and the additional winning is achieved with a probability of 30%.

After executing the process of step S3802, in step S3803, the AT addition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game is performed with the above lottery table and the step. It is executed from the additional lottery random number acquired in S3701. In this case as well, the result is the same as the result of the AT addition lottery in the stop AT addition lottery process (FIG. 78 (b)), and the AT addition lottery executed in step S3803 does not result in the addition winning. If the additional lottery is not performed when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the additional lottery is not performed even in the additional pre-determination process when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. May be.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in step S3804 after executing the process of specifying the result of the additional lottery at the time of stop in step S3802 or step S3803 in advance at the start. It is determined whether or not to win the additional lottery, and when the additional lottery is won, a process of setting the first operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3805. Further, whether or not to win the additional lottery when a negative determination is made in step S3804 or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in step S3806 after the process of step S3805 is executed. When the additional lottery is won, the process of setting the second operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3807. If a negative determination is made in step S3806, or after the process of step S3807 is executed, the addition pre-determination process is terminated.

FIG. 82 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the start-time effect setting process in this modification. As described above, the start-time effect setting process is a process executed when the display control device 81 receives the start-time command at the start of the game.

Steps S3901 to S3903 are the same as the processes of steps S2001 to S2003, and are the cases where the lottery result command for the push order bell group is received, and the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are won. If any of the push order notification commands for is received, the push order notification effect of the corresponding operation order is set.

If it is determined in step S3901 that the lottery result command for the push order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the lottery result command for the special role has been received. When the lottery result command for the special role is received, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not the push order notification command is received. As described above, when the push order notification command is output in the special role winning game, it means that the AT mode is in progress. As described above, the push order notification command at the time of winning the special combination is a push order notification command indicating the operation order for winning the sixth small combination.

If the special combination is won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3906, and it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned first operation winning notice command has been received. If the first operation winning notice command has not been received, that is, if the additional lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, the process proceeds to step S3903 and the sixth small winning combination is performed. Set so that the push order notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the winning is performed. In this case, based on the winning of the special role, it is possible to establish the sixth small winning combination prize in which eight medals are paid out, instead of the 33rd small winning combination winning in which one medal is paid out. That is, in the additional lottery based on the special role this time, if the operation in the first operation mode is not a winning, the operation is performed in the second operation mode in which the number of medals to be paid out is large, so that the AT mode is in effect. It is possible to improve the medal increase speed (net increase in number).

On the other hand, even if the special role is won in the AT mode, it is determined in step S3906 that the first operation winning notice command is received, and the first operation mode in this special role winning game. If the additional winning is achieved by operating in step S3907, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not it is confirmed that the number of games in the AT mode and the number of medals increased will reach the upper limit of the advantageous section. As described above, in the remaining game number management process (step S1804) in the section display second process (FIG. 46) on the main control device 101 side, the total of the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games in the AT mode is , If the situation is greater than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section and it is already confirmed that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section will be reached by digesting the remaining AT modes, the first excess command is output. do. Further, in the remaining number management process (step S1805) in the second section display process, the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) with the current number of remaining games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. If the situation is such that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached by digesting the remaining AT modes, the second excess command is output. In step S3907 described above, by grasping whether or not these first excess commands and second excess commands have been received, it is possible to determine whether or not the situation is such that the upper limit of the advantageous section will be reached. be.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the upper limit is not reached, in step S3908, the AT-in-time specific notification effect is set to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3907 that the upper limit is reached, that is, in the special role winning game this time, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the additional winning is achieved. However, if the situation is such that the number of games and the number of medals increased may be meaningless even if the AT mode addition process is performed based on the additional winning, proceed to step S3903 and correspond to the sixth small winning combination. Set so that the push order notification effect of the operation order to be performed is performed. In this case, in the special role winning game, it is possible to establish the sixth small role winning with a large number of medals paid out.

That is, in this modification, in the special role winning game in the AT mode, even if the additional winning is achieved if the game is operated in the first operation mode, the relationship with the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section. If the operation mode instructed in is different and the number of games in the remaining AT mode that has already been determined reaches the maximum number of games in the advantageous section or the maximum number of games in the AT mode, the AT mode will be further increased. Since it is not necessary to perform the addition process, the operation is performed not in the first operation mode but in the second operation mode so that the sixth small winning combination winning with a large number of medals paid out is established. By doing so, in a situation where it is certain that the upper limit will be reached, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the emptiness of winning the additional prize, and to reach the upper limit. If is confirmed, the maximum number of medals can be reached at an early stage, or the total number of medals paid out when the maximum number of games is reached can be increased.

As the specific notification effect during AT in step S3908, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the character of the exclamation mark is assistedly displayed in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided. The effect of displaying three is set in the unit 65, and the same effect as the above-mentioned specific combination notification effect is set.

In the present embodiment, when the cherries A to C are won among the specific roles, the 10th re-game prize to the 12th re-game prize can be established, and the 12th re-game prize is established. If the 12th re-game prize is established when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a possible timing, it is confirmed that the cherry B or cherry C has been won, and the 12th re-game prize is awarded. If the 10th re-game prize is established even though the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at a timing that can be established, it is determined that the cherry A has been established. On the other hand, if the 11th replay prize is established, it is not possible to determine which of the cherries A to C has been won.

Then, if the type of cherry A to C is to be discriminated when the specific role notification effect occurs, at least the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize are established instead of the 11th re-game prize. It can be said that it is necessary to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at the timing. The 10th re-game symbol and the 12th re-game symbol on the left reel 32L are "BAR" symbols, and the 11th re-game symbol is a "red 7" symbol, a "red shell" symbol, and a "white shell" symbol, so the left. The timing at which the 10th re-game prize and the 12th re-game prize can be established on the reel 32L is a timing corresponding to the first operation mode at the time of winning the special combination.

That is, when the specific combination notification effect is performed, the stop switches 42 to 44 are the first operation mode if the player is trying to determine the type of the winning combination, even if it is not triggered by the special combination. It is thought that it will be operated at. Therefore, by setting the notification mode of the specific notification effect during AT to the same notification mode as the notification mode of the specific combination notification effect, it can be expected that the same operation will be performed even when the special combination is won. It is not necessary to store the effect data dedicated to the specific notification effect, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity. On the contrary, from the player's point of view, when the specific combination notification effect or the specific combination notification effect during AT is performed, it can be grasped that there is a possibility that the special role has been won. Therefore, as the first operation mode, the left reel It is considered that the 32L "BAR" symbol is first aimed and operated. As a result, it becomes possible to distinguish between cherries A to C, and it becomes possible to fully understand the game playability such that the additional winning probability differs depending on the winning result. It is possible to make you feel.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the special combination is not won, it is determined in step S3909 whether or not the specific combination is won, and if the specific combination is won, the specific combination is notified in step S3910. Execute the process for producing the effect. Step S3909 and step S3910 are the same as the processes of step S2006 and step S2007. If a negative determination is made in step S3902, step S3905 or step S3909, or after executing the process of step S3903, step S3908 or step S3910, the process proceeds to step S2008 to execute the start time precursor effect setting process.

By doing the above, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the operation mode at the time of winning the special role is different depending on the relationship between the additional winning and reaching the upper limit, and then the net increase in the number of sheets in the AT mode is changed. It is possible to make it different according to. That is, in the AT mode, if the first operation winning notice command is received and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the additional lottery is won, and if it is meaningful to perform the additional winning. By operating in the first operation mode, the net increase in the number of sheets in the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.74 per game. On the other hand, even if the additional lottery is won by operating in the first operation mode when the first operation winning notice command is received in the AT mode, even if the additional winning is performed. If it is meaningless, by operating in the second operation mode, the net increase in the number of cards in AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.98 per game, and the first operation when the additional winning is won. The net increase in the number of sheets is larger than that in the case of operating in the mode. In this way, if the situation is meaningless even if the additional winning is won, the upper limit increase number can be increased earlier by operating in an operation mode in which the additional lottery is not performed to improve the medal increase speed. You will be able to reach, and you will be able to increase the number of cards you can increase when you reach the maximum number of games.

Further, in a situation where it is before the reception of the first excess command or the second excess command and it is not confirmed that the upper limit is reached, the specific notification effect during AT is produced regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received. (Specific role notification effect) may be executed. In this way, it becomes impossible or difficult to determine whether or not the additional lottery has been won, so that it may be necessary to always operate in the first operation mode when the special combination is won. Then, the net increase in the number of games progressing in such a mode can be expected to increase by about 2.63 per game, and the specific notification effect during AT (specific role) only when the first operation winning notice command is received. It will be less than the net increase in the number of sheets in the mode of executing the notification effect).

In this case, for example, in the early stage of the transition to the AT mode, the game is played in a mode in which the specific notification effect during AT (specific combination notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received at the time of winning the special combination. Specified during AT only when the first operation winning notice command is received when the progress is made and a predetermined opportunity occurs (for example, when transition conditions such as winning a transition lottery or digesting a predetermined number of sets are satisfied). The game is switched to a mode in which the notification effect (specific combination notification effect) is executed, and when the first excess command or the second excess command is received, the additional lottery is won by operating in the first operation mode. Even in this case, the mode of notification may be switched according to the situation, such as switching to a game in which the game is operated in the second operation mode. When the first operation winning notice command is received from the game in which the specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received at the time of winning the special combination. After switching to the game in which the specific notification effect during AT (specific combination notification effect) is executed, the specific notification effect during AT (specific) is further performed regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notification command is received when the special role is won. There may be a case where the game is switched to a mode in which the role notification effect) is executed. In addition, a game in which a specific notification effect during AT (specific combination notification effect) is executed regardless of whether or not a first operation winning notice command is received when a special combination is won at the time of transition to AT mode, and a first operation winning notice command are played. The configuration may be such that it is determined by lottery or the like whether the game is to be played in a mode in which the specific notification effect during AT (specific combination notification effect) is executed only when the command is received.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, the mode of push order notification when a special combination is won during the AT mode is different from that of the above embodiment. Specifically, in the above embodiment, when a special combination is won during the AT mode, the operation order corresponding to the predetermined sixth small combination winning among the first small combination winning to the sixth small winning combination is It was configured to perform push order notification and push order notification effect. On the other hand, in this modification, which of the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning operation order is notified is determined by lottery.

FIG. 83A is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result correspondence process in this modification.

After the start AT lottery process is executed in step S607 or the AT addition process is executed in step S609, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the push order bell is won. If the push order bell is won, in steps S4002 to S4005, the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are supported in the AT mode in the same manner as in the above steps S611 to S614. The process for pushing order notification and pushing order notification effect of the operation order to be performed is executed, and if the AT mode is not set, the pushing order notification is not executed and the pushing order bell group notification is performed.

If the push order bell is not won in step S4001, it is determined in step S4006 whether or not the special combination is won. If the special combination is won, it is determined in step S4007 whether or not the AT mode flag is set, and if it is not set, the special combination notification is performed in step S4008. The process of step S4008 is the same as the process of step S617.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S4007 and the special combination is won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, the notification small winning combination lottery process is executed. In the notification small winning combination lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether to execute the push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning to the sixth small winning combination winning at the time of winning the special combination. In this case, the notification small combination lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 105a is acquired, and which small combination the push order notification corresponds to is selected.

After the notification small winning combination lottery process is executed in step S4009, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to notify the push order of the operation order corresponding to the processing result of step S4009 in step S4010. Then, in step S4010, a process of setting a push order notification command corresponding to the process result of step S4009 as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4006, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the notification small combination lottery table used in the notification small combination lottery process in step S4009 is the ratio of the small combination selected according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. Is set to be different. Of these, for the 2nd to 6th small combinations, especially in the settings 1, 3 and 5, the ratio of the 3rd small combination and the 5th small combination to be selected is the 2nd small combination, the 4th small combination and the ratio. It is set to be higher than the ratio at which the sixth small combination is selected, and in settings 2 and 4, the ratio at which the second small combination, the fourth small combination, and the sixth small combination are selected is higher. It is possible to predict the set value from the selection rate of the notified small winning combination, such as the third small winning combination and the fifth small winning combination are set to be higher than the selected ratio. There is.

In addition, the rate at which the first small winning combination is selected differs depending on the set value, and the higher the setting value (higher setting), the higher the rate at which the first small winning combination is selected. There is. Therefore, it is possible to predict the set value from the selection rate of the first small winning combination. Here, the push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is the operation order of left → middle → right, and when the left reel 32L is stopped first in the special winning combination winning game, it is as described above. Depending on the timing of the stop operation, the 33rd small winning combination is established instead of the 1st small winning combination.

That is, during the AT mode, the stop switches 42 to 44 are notified at the timing when the push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is performed and the 33rd small winning combination can be established. If the 33rd small winning combination is established instead of the 1st small winning combination, the pushing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the 1st small winning combination is triggered by the special combination. If the first small winning combination is established instead of the 33rd small winning combination, the pushing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is triggered by the pushing order bell. I can understand that it was. By doing so, in predicting the set value from the ratio of the push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination, the push order bell is triggered by devising the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the prediction by excluding the push order notification, and it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy.

However, if an attempt is made to improve the prediction accuracy of such a set value, one medal will be paid out instead of eight medals being paid out. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as letting the player select whether to improve the prediction accuracy of the set value or to increase the number of medals to be paid out.

Moreover, as described above, when a special combination is won during the AT mode, the push order notification corresponding to any of the first small combination winning to the sixth small winning combination is performed, so that each operation order is performed. It is possible to average the occurrence rate of the push order notification of. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the push order notification corresponding to the predetermined operation order is likely to occur when the push order notification is performed, and this is caused by such a bias. It is possible to prevent inconvenience. For example, in the AT mode, the push order notification and the push order notification effect are generated even in the cherries A to C and the chance eyes A to C other than when the push order bell is won or the special role is won, and then the push order bell is generated. If it is difficult or impossible to visually distinguish between the push order notification and the push order notification effect of the special role and the push order notification and the push order notification effect of the cherries A to C and the chance eyes A to C, the push order notification is made. When a production, etc. occurs, the player takes the opportunity that the push order notification production, etc. is Cherry A to C or Chance Eyes A to C, which are easy to win in the AT addition lottery, or a special role. It is thought that we expect something to happen. However, if the occurrence rate of the push order notification effect is biased depending on the operation order as described above, the lottery result cannot be predicted or is difficult to predict from the mode of the push order notification effect. , The inconvenience that the lottery result triggered by the operation order is predicted may occur. In that respect, as described above, it is possible to suitably avoid such inconvenience by adopting an aspect in which the operation order is less likely to be biased.

In this modification, the variation (standard deviation) of the push order notification occurrence rate corresponding to the first small combination to the sixth small combination is 7% in setting 1, 5% in setting 2, 6% in setting 3, and setting 4. Is 7%, setting 5 is 7%, setting 6 is 15%, and the average variation of each setting value is 8%. On the other hand, the variation in the occurrence rate of the push order notification corresponding to the first small combination is 13%, which is larger than the average value of the variation in the push order notification of the first small combination to the sixth small combination. expensive. In other words, it is more efficient to predict the set value only from the occurrence rate of the push order notification of the first small winning combination than to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the push order notification of each small winning combination. It is possible to do.

However, even if the push order notification corresponding to the first small combination is performed when the special combination is won, if the operation is performed in the second operation mode without operating in the first operation mode, the first small combination prize will be won. Although it holds true, it becomes impossible to determine whether or not it is triggered by the winning of the forward push bells 1 and 2. In other words, if the first small winning combination is established when the special role is won, it will be confused with the first small winning combination triggered by the push order bell, and it will not be possible to efficiently predict the set value. .. By doing this, if you want to predict the set value, you can realize the gameplay aiming at the 33rd small winning combination on the side with the smaller number of payouts, and you can break away from the game aiming to increase the number of medals, and you are in AT mode. The interest of the game is improved.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, the small winning combination at the time of winning the special combination is drawn at a predetermined opportunity, and the small winning combination is determined by diverting the lottery result at the time of winning the special combination thereafter. FIG. 84A is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section in this modification. The advantageous section transition process is a process executed in step S1706 in the section display first process (FIG. 45).

In step S4021, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, the process of acquiring the ceiling game number table is executed in the following step S4022, and the ceiling game number lottery process is executed in step S4023. Then, in step S4024, the processing result of step S4023 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step S4025, a process of setting a ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. As described above, the ceiling counter is subjected to a subtraction value lottery according to the lottery result of each game, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the transition to the AT mode occurs without going through the AT mode transition lottery. ..

In step S4026, the notification small winning combination lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 84B, the notification small combination lottery table used in the notification small combination lottery process in this modification is the small combination selected by the set value set in the winning probability setting process. The proportions are set to be different. Of the 6 operation sequences, 5 are set to have the same selection rate, and only the remaining 1 operation sequence is the selection rate of the other operation sequence. It is set to be different. Then, the operation order different from the selection rate of the other operation order is set so as to be different depending on the set value.

In this case, the variation in the selection rate of the push order notification of the first small combination to the sixth small combination and the variation for each set value in each push order notification are the same value, and if the set value is predicted. , It becomes necessary to count the occurrence rates of the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination, respectively. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

After executing the small winning combination lottery process in step S4026, the small winning combination of the lottery result is stored in the small winning combination counter of various counter areas 106e in step S4027, and then the processing at the time of transition to the advantageous section. To finish. In this case, when the first small combination is selected as the processing result of step S4026, 1 is input to the notification small combination counter, and when the second small combination is selected, 2 is input to the notification small combination counter. Any value from 1 to 6 is input to the notification small winning combination counter, such as inputting. Then, in step S618 in the lottery result correspondence process in this modification, the push order notification to be executed is determined with reference to the value of the notification small combination counter. That is, if 1 is input to the notification small combination counter, the push order notification of the first small combination is executed, and the push order notification command corresponding to the first small combination is set (step S619), and the notification small combination counter. If 2 is input to, the push order notification of the second small winning combination is executed, and the pushing order notification command corresponding to the second small winning combination is set.

By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of each game because it is not necessary to execute the notification small combination lottery process when the special combination is won, while causing randomness in the push order notification. ..

As described above, since the notification small winning combination lottery process is executed in the advantageous section transition processing, the notification small at the time of winning the special combination each time the advantageous section is transferred (every time the advantageous section ends). The role will be changed. By doing so, the push order notification becomes more random, and it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the fact that the special role is won is not detected due to the bias of the push order notification. It is also possible to improve the difficulty level of the predicted game of the set value, and it is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In this modification, a modification of the notification small winning combination lottery table will be described.

FIG. 85A shows an example in which the push order notification corresponding to the first small winning combination and the second small winning combination is not selected. That is, the operation order corresponding to the first small combination and the second small combination in which the possibility of the first operation mode occurs when the special combination is won is not selected. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the possibility of winning the 33rd small winning combination with a small number of medals paid out during the AT mode, and to realize a smoother increase in medals.

FIG. 85 (b) shows a configuration in which the push order notification of the first small combination and the second small combination does not occur when the special combination is won, and the winning probability on the push order bell side is adjusted to notify each push order. An example of trying to equalize the above is shown.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (b1), since the special role is won with a probability of about 5% (about 1/20) in each game, the third special role is triggered in each game during the AT mode. The push order notification corresponding to the small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination occurs with a probability of about 1.25%. On the other hand, the push order notification corresponding to the first small combination to the second small combination triggered by the special combination does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85 (b2), the push order bells that win with a probability of about 64% (about 1 / 1.56) in each game are the forward push bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first small winning combination. And the pinch push bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the second small winning combination are set so as to be easier to win than the winning combination corresponding to the other third small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination. In this modification, 18% of the full push order bells are allocated to the forward push bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first small combination and the pinch push bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the second small combination, and the like. 16% is allocated to the role of. As a result, in each game, the push order notification corresponding to the first small role and the second small role is generated with a probability of about 11.54%, respectively, with the push order bell as an opportunity, and the third small role to the sixth small role. Each corresponding push order notification has a probability of about 10.25%.

Then, when the push order notification triggered by these special roles and the push order notification triggered by the push order bell are totaled, as shown in FIG. 85 (b3), the first small role and the second small role are supported. Each push order notification is generated with a probability of about 11.54%, and the push order notification corresponding to the third small combination to the sixth small combination is generated with a probability of about 11.50%, respectively. As a result, it is possible to make the difference smaller than the difference in the occurrence rate of each notification in the special role (about 1.25%) (about 0.04%). In this way, by compensating for the bias of the push order notification triggered by the special role by the push order notification of other results, it becomes possible to suitably equalize the push order notification, and the push order notification becomes possible. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game result is predicted.

<Modification 10>
In this modification, even in the advantageous section transition lottery process triggered by the special combination, the content of the lottery process differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed at the start of the game, but in this modification, the configuration is changed to be executed at the end of the game. Although detailed description of this point will be omitted, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is not set in the lottery result corresponding process in this modification, the advantageous section transition lottery in step S605 is performed. The lottery result handling process is terminated as it is without executing the process. The advantageous section transition lottery process in this modification is executed in the section display second process of step S416 in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in this modification.

In this modification, when it is determined in step S4101 that the advantageous section flag is not set, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S4111, and then the section display second process ends. Other than that, the processing of steps S4101 to S4110 is the same as the processing of steps S1801 to S1810.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition lottery process in this modification.

In this modification, after grasping the game lottery result in step S4201, the process of grasping the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game is executed in step S4202. Then, the process of acquiring the advantageous section transition lottery table is executed in step S4203, the random number for the advantageous section transition lottery is acquired in step S4204, and the advantageous section transition lottery is executed in step S4205.

As shown in FIG. 89A, the advantageous section transition lottery table in this modification has a different winning probability of the transition lottery triggered by the special role as compared with that of the above embodiment, and other results. The winning probability of the transition lottery triggered by is the same. Specifically, in this modification, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery when the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special combination winning game is the first operation mode is higher than the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode. Is set to be high, and in the first operation mode, the advantageous section transition lottery is won with a 100% probability, and in the second operation mode, the advantageous section transition lottery is won with a 0% probability. That is, if it is the second operation mode, it is set so as not to shift to the advantageous section.

After executing the advantageous section transition lottery in step S4205, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not the transition lottery has been won, and if so, the advantageous section winning game flag is set in step S4207. Execute the process to be performed. By such a process, the advantageous section flag is set in the section display first process of the next game.

After executing the process of step S4207, the advantageous section transition process is executed in step S4208. That is, in this modification, the advantageous section transition process is not executed in step S1706 in the section display first process (FIG. 45), but is executed in step S4208. If a negative determination is made in step S4206, or after the process of step S4208 is executed, the advantageous section transition lottery process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the special combination is won in the normal section, the operation shifts to the advantageous section in the game, while if the operation is performed in the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the operation is in the advantageous section in the game. Will not migrate. As described above, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the 33rd small winning combination is established and one medal is paid out, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination are awarded. Once established, eight medals will be paid out. In the internal state, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed in the 3-bet game, and the advantageous section transition lottery is won by all the lottery results except the out-of-order result and the special role. Even if you do not move to the advantageous section in this game by establishing the 6th small winning combination, if you move to the advantageous section in the next game, two medals will increase, which is advantageous for the player. Become. That is, in the normal section, it is advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode.

In the advantageous section transition processing in step S4208, the number of ceiling games is set according to the lottery result of each game. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88, the process of grasping the lottery result of this game is executed in step S4301. Then, the process of acquiring the ceiling game number table is executed in step S4302, and the ceiling game number lottery process is executed in step S4303. Then, in step S4304, the processing result of step S4303 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step S4305, a process of setting a ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. , Ends the processing at the time of transition to this advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the ceiling game number table in this modification has 700 games as the maximum ceiling except for the ceiling game number lottery triggered by a special role, and is based on the maximum ceiling game number according to the lottery result. It is set so that a small number of ceiling games can be selected. Specifically, the lower the appearance rate as a result of the lottery of the game, the easier it is to select a smaller number of ceiling games. For example, the number of ceiling games in chance eye C is smaller than that in chance eye A. Is set to be easy to select.

The number of ceiling games selected when the special role is won is set so that the number of ceiling games selected differs depending on the operation mode of the special role winning game, and 700 games are selected in the first operation mode. In the second operation mode, 1000 games, which is more than the 700 games, are selected as the number of ceiling games. However, in this modification, as described above, in the special combination winning game, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, it is set not to win the advantageous section transition lottery, so that the special combination is used as an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. In this case, the number of ceiling games is practically 700 games.

In other words, in the normal section, shifting to the advantageous section in the special role winning game is more disadvantageous to the player than in the case of shifting to the advantageous section in other lottery results in terms of the number of selected ceiling games. If you shift to the advantageous section in the special role winning game, the number of ceiling games is 700 games, but if you shift to the advantageous section in other lottery results, the number of games is less than the 700 games. The number can be selected as the number of ceiling games. In this case, in the normal section, the operation is performed in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special combination to avoid the transition to the advantageous section in the game, and to shift to the advantageous section in other lottery results in the next and subsequent games. It is more advantageous for the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 89B, in the special role in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the content of the processing related to the instruction function differs, the normal section and the advantageous section will eventually be used. It will be different whether it is more advantageous to operate according to the operation mode of. That is, in the advantageous section, in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery in the processing related to the instruction function are executed, but in the second operation mode, these AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are executed. Is not executed, so in the playability of shifting to the AT mode and aiming to increase medals, the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode by operating in the first operation mode if it is in an advantageous section. It is more advantageous for the player than. On the other hand, in the normal section, in the first operation mode, the advantageous section transition lottery in the processing related to the instruction function is executed, but in the second operation mode, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. At first glance, it seems that the operation in the first operation mode is more advantageous than the operation in the second operation mode in terms of the playability of shifting to the advantageous section and aiming at the transition to the AT mode. However, as described above, the number of ceiling games is set so that the number of ceiling games can be smaller when the player shifts to the advantageous section triggered by another result than when the special role triggers the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, substantially, when the special combination is won during the normal section, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode than to operate in the first operation mode. Therefore, the advantageous operation mode differs between the normal section and the advantageous section when the special combination is won, and by using such a configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, an example of providing a plurality of types of special roles will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90A, in the present modification, the first privilege is given to the lottery table for the normal gaming state in the 3-bet game by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode. At the same time, the first process is executed as a process related to the instruction function, and by operating in the second operation mode, a second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given, and as a process related to the instruction function, a game rather than the first process. A special role A, a special role B, and a special role C are set as special roles for which a second process that is disadvantageous to the person is executed. Each of the special roles A to C is set to be won with a probability of about 1/60, and the probability of winning any of the special roles A to C is about 1/20. Similar to morphology.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), in this modification, the first operation mode and the second operation mode set for each of the special combinations A to C are different, and the winning result is different from the above embodiment. ing.

Specifically, the special combination A is set to operate the left stop switch 42 first as the specific order, and operates the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 as the specific order first. It is set as the second operation mode, and when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, one of the 9th small winning combination to the 33rd small winning combination is established instead of the 33rd small winning combination. One medal is paid out, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, one of the third small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is established and eight medals are paid out.

Further, the special combination B is set to operate the middle stop switch 43 first as the specific order, and the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 may be operated first as the specific order. It is set as the second operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, one medal is established by winning one of the 9th small combination to the 33rd small combination instead of the 33rd small combination. Payout occurs, and when operated in the second operation mode, one of the first small winning combination, the second small winning combination, the fifth small winning combination, and the sixth small winning combination is established, and eight medals are paid out. ..

The special combination C is set to operate the right stop switch 44 first as the specific order, and the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 is set as the specific order to operate first. It is set as an operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, one of the 9th small combination to the 33rd small combination is won instead of the 33rd small combination, and one medal is paid out. When the operation is performed in the second operation mode, any of the first small winning combination to the fourth small winning combination is established and eight medals are paid out.

The first process and the second process as the processes related to the instruction functions of the special roles A to C are the same as those in the above embodiment, and when operated in the first operation mode, there is a 10% probability in the normal mode. The AT mode transition is won, and in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 50%, but when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the AT mode transition is not won. In addition, in the AT mode, there is a 10% chance of winning the prize regardless of the operation mode.

That is, in this modification, in each of the special roles A to C, the first operation mode is set as the second operation mode in another special role, and the second operation mode is the first operation mode in another special role. Is set as. Specifically, the first operation mode of the special role A is the second operation mode of the special role B and the special role C, and the second operation mode of the special role A is the first operation mode of the special role B. Further, the first operation mode of the special role B is the second operation mode of the special role A and the special role C, and the second operation mode of the special role B is the first operation mode of the special role C. The first operation mode of the special combination C is the second operation mode of the special combination A and the special combination B, and the second operation mode of the special combination C is the first operation mode of the special combination A.

Further, in the special combinations A to C in this modification, although the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is associated with the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is Is not associated. That is, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order associated with the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated in the first operation mode and the second operation mode regardless of the operation timing. As a result, the winning of the corresponding result is established, and the processing related to the instruction function is executed.

By doing so, for example, even if the game is played in the operation mode in which the same stop switch is first operated in each game, the operation mode at the time of winning the special combination is not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode. It can also be an operation mode. That is, in the above embodiment, when the game is played in the operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is first operated, there are cases where the first operation mode is used and the second operation mode is used. When the game is played in the game mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the first operation mode is not used and the second operation mode is always used. On the other hand, in this modification, even if the game is played in the operation mode in which any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, it can be not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode. .. Therefore, it becomes easy to guarantee the fairness of the game.

However, at the time of winning the special role, whether to operate in the first operation mode to advantageously advance the processing related to the instruction function, or to operate in the second operation mode to obtain many medals, etc. It is up to the player to select the game, and this point is also selectable by the player in this modification. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery result correspondence process in this modification.

If it is determined in step S610 that the lottery result of this game is not the push order bell winning, the process proceeds to step S4401. In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is any special combination winning, and if it is not the special combination winning, the main lottery result correspondence process is terminated as it is. If any of the special roles is won, the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, the AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the AT mode is in progress. If it is not in the AT mode, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not the special combination elected this time is the special combination A. In the case of the special combination A, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled in step S4404 so that the notification that the special combination A is performed among the operation mode combinations is performed.

Here, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), “7”, “8”, and “9” are set as the display modes of the instruction monitor 68, and these “7” and “8” are set. , "9" are set so that "7" corresponds to special role A, "8" corresponds to special role B, and "9" corresponds to special role C as notification of the type of operation mode role. Has been done. That is, in the case of the special combination A in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7 to are lit and displayed, and "7" is displayed. Further, in the case of the special combination B in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 to are lit and displayed, and "8" is displayed. Then, in the case of the special combination C in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed as “9”. Is displayed. All of the displays "7" to "9" can be identified by the player, and the player notifies which of the special roles A to C the special role A to C is won by the operation mode role type. It is possible to grasp from.

In step S4404, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that "7" is displayed as a notification that the special combination A is among the above-mentioned operation mode combinations. As a result, the lottery result of this game is the special role A winning, and the first operation mode is obtained by operating the left stop switch 42 first, and the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 are operated first. The player can grasp that the second operation mode is adopted.

Further, in this modification, the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side can be generated even when the mode is not in the AT mode.

That is, after executing the process of step S4404, it is determined in step S4405 whether or not the switching flag for A is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The switching flag for A is a flag for adjusting the frequency of occurrence of each push order notification effect in performing the push order notification effect when the special combination A is won. That is, when it is determined that the switching flag for A is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for A is executed in step S4406, and in the following step S4407, if it is a push order bell, the first small winning combination After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order (left → middle → right) corresponding to (left → middle → right) as the output target to the display control device 81, the present lottery result correspondence process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4405 that the switching flag for A is set, the process of clearing the switching flag for A is executed in step S4408, and in step S4409, if it is a push order bell, the second small After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order (left → right → middle) corresponding to the combination as the output target to the display control device 81, the final lottery result correspondence process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4403 that it is not the special combination A, the process proceeds to step S4410, and it is determined whether or not the special combination elected this time is the special combination B. In the case of the special role B, in step S4411, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that "8" is displayed as a notification to the effect that the special role B is among the operation mode combinations. Then, in step S4412, it is determined whether or not the B switching flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If the switching flag for B is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for B is executed in step S4413, and if it is a push order bell in step S4414, the operation order corresponding to the third small winning combination (middle → left). → Right) The push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the lottery result correspondence process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4412 that the B switching flag is set, the process of clearing the B switching flag is executed in step S4415, and in step S4416, if it is a push order bell, the fourth small is executed. After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order (middle → right → left) corresponding to the combination as the output target to the display control device 81, the present lottery result correspondence process is terminated.

Further, the case where it is determined in step S4410 that the special role is not the special role B means that the special role this time is the special role C. In this case, in the step S4417, the special role C among the operation mode roles is used. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that "9" is displayed as a notification to that effect. Then, in step S4418, it is determined whether or not the C switching flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. If the C switching flag is not set, the process of setting the C switching flag is executed in step S4419, and if it is a push order bell in step S4420, the operation order corresponding to the fifth small winning combination (right → left). → The process of setting the push order notification command of (middle) as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4418 that the C switching flag is set, the process of clearing the C switching flag is executed in step S4421, and in step S4422, if it is a push order bell, the sixth small After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order (right → middle → left) corresponding to the combination as the output target to the display control device 81, the present lottery result correspondence process is terminated.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), when the special combinations A to C are won in the normal mode or the CZ mode, the notification that the special combinations A to C are used as the notification of the type of the operation mode combination in the instruction monitor 68 is notified. Are done respectively. As a result, for example, the lottery result of this game is the special combination A winning, and the first operation mode is obtained by operating the left stop switch 42 first, and the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 are operated first. As a result, the player can grasp that the second operation mode is adopted, the lottery result of this game is the special role B winning, and the first operation mode is obtained by operating the middle stop switch 43 first. The player can grasp that the second operation mode is obtained by first operating the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 44, and the lottery result of this game is the special role C winning, and the right stop switch. The player can grasp that the first operation mode is obtained by operating the 44 first, and the second operation mode is obtained by first operating the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 43.

Here, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 91, the notification mode of the push order notification effect when the special combination in the AT mode or the push order bell is won, and the push order notification when the special combination is won in the normal mode or the CZ mode. The notification mode of the production is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the special role in the AT mode and the push order notification effect when the push order bell is won, for example, a number is added to the yellow character corresponding to the "bell" symbol. While it is set to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the push order notification effect when the special combination is won in the normal mode or the CZ mode, the numbers are displayed. The color of the character marked with is different from that in AT mode. For example, a number is added to the purple character to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (in the figure, the hatches are displayed in different directions. Yes). By doing so, when the push order notification effect occurs before the transition to the AT mode, the player knows that the push order notification effect does not correspond to the push order bell but corresponds to the special role. It is possible to clearly inform the person, and it is possible not to give a sense of discomfort that neither the 1st small role to the 6th small role winning is established even though the operation is performed according to the push order notification effect. can. Even in this modification, as described above, in the AT mode, the push order notification effect when the special combination is won and the push order notification effect when the push order bell is won have the same notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect the effect of pushing the special role winning and confusing it with the order bell winning.

Further, as the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, in the case of the special combination A, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first small combination and the operation order corresponding to the second small combination are used. The corresponding push order notification effect is executed alternately, and in the case of the special combination B, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the third small combination and the operation order corresponding to the fourth small combination are performed. The corresponding push order notification effect is executed alternately, and in the case of the special combination C, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fifth small combination and the operation order corresponding to the sixth small combination are performed. The corresponding push order notification effect and the corresponding push order notification effect are executed alternately. By doing so, in the normal mode and the CZ mode, it is possible to more reliably receive the AT mode transition lottery on the advantageous side at the time of winning the special roles A to C by the push order notification effect, and to generate the special combination A to C. It is possible to prevent the push order notification effect from being biased.

If it is determined in step S4402 that the special combination has been won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether or not the special combination elected this time is the special combination A. In the case of the special combination A, it is determined in step S4424 whether or not the switching flag for A is set. If the switching flag for A is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for A is executed in step S4425, and if it is a push order bell in step S4426, the operation order corresponding to the third small winning combination (middle → left). → Control so that the push order notification of (right) is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4427, the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the third small combination as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4424 that the switching flag for A is set, the process of clearing the switching flag for A is executed in step S4428, and in step S4429, if it is a push order bell, the fourth small The instruction monitor 68 controls the push order notification of the operation order (middle → right → left) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step S4430, a process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fourth small combination as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4423 that it is not the special combination A, it is determined in step S4431 whether or not the special combination elected this time is the special combination B. In the case of the special combination B, it is determined in step S4432 whether or not the B switching flag is set. If the B switching flag is not set, the process of setting the B switching flag is executed in step S4433, and if it is a push order bell in step S4434, the operation order corresponding to the fifth small winning combination (right → left). → Control so that the push order notification of (middle) is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4435, a process of setting a push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fifth small winning combination as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4432 that the B switching flag is set, the process of clearing the B switching flag is executed in step S4436, and in step S4437, if it is a push order bell, the sixth small The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification of the operation order (right → middle → left) corresponding to the combination is performed. Then, in step S4438, the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the sixth small combination as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

When it is determined in step S4431 that the special role is not the special role B, it means that the special role elected this time is the special role C. In this case, in step S4439, it is determined whether or not the C switching flag is set. If the C switching flag is not set, the process of setting the C switching flag is executed in step S4440, and if it is a push order bell in step S4441, the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination (left → middle). → Control so that the push order notification of (right) is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Then, in step S4442, the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4439 that the C switching flag is set, the process of clearing the C switching flag is executed in step S4443, and in step S4443, if it is a push order bell, the second small is executed. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification of the operation order (left → right → middle) corresponding to the combination is performed. Then, in step S4444, the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the second small combination as the output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process of dealing with the lottery result is terminated.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), as a push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side in the AT mode, in the case of the special combination A, the push order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the third small combination. The notification effect and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the 4th small combination are executed alternately, and in the case of the special combination B, the push order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the 5th small combination. The notification effect and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the sixth small combination are executed alternately, and in the case of the special combination C, the push order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first small combination. The notification effect and the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the second small winning combination are executed alternately. By doing so, in the AT mode, it is possible to establish a small winning combination with a large number of medals paid out when the special roles A to C are won by the push order notification effect, and the push order notification effect generated is biased. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

As described above, in this modification, a plurality of types of special roles are provided, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are set to be staggered in each special role, thereby corresponding to one special role. If the operation is continued in one operation mode, another special role will be operated in the second operation mode, and the game according to the first operation mode and the game according to the second operation mode will be equally performed in each special role. It becomes possible to play a game, and it becomes easy to guarantee the fairness of the game.

In addition, at the time of winning each special combination, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode is generated in the normal mode and the CZ mode, and the push order notification corresponding to the second operation mode is generated in the AT mode. Any special combination can be operated in the first operation mode until the AT mode transition, and can be operated in the second operation mode after the AT mode transition. Also makes it possible to play the game in the above embodiment.

Further, in the configuration corresponding to the operation order in which a plurality of small winning combinations are won if the first operation mode and the second operation mode are push order bells, the operation order for notifying the special winning combination is switched. .. That is, for example, in the special combination A, before the AT mode transition, if the push order bell is used, the push order notification effect corresponding to the operation order of the first small combination and the second small combination is alternately switched, and after the shift to the AT mode. If it is a push order bell, the operation order corresponding to the third small winning combination and the fourth small winning combination is alternately switched. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the bias of the push order notification effect with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 12>
In this modification, an example will be described in which a plurality of special combinations are provided as in the above modification 11, and the mode of processing related to the instruction function is different depending on each special combination. Specifically, in this modification, the processing related to the instruction function during AT is different between the special role A, the special role B, and the special role C.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the first operation mode and the second operation mode in the special combinations A to C are the same as those in the above modification 11, and the first operation mode of the special combination A is the special combination B, The second operation mode of C, the first operation mode of the special combination B is the second operation mode of the special combinations C and A, and the first operation mode of the special combination C is the second operation mode of the special combinations A and B. Is set as. Further, before the transition to the AT mode, any of the special roles A to C can receive the AT mode transition lottery by operating in the first operation mode, and the AT mode can be received by operating in the second operation mode. It is set so that you cannot receive the transition lottery.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 94, in the AT mode, if the special combinations A and B are used, the same AT addition lottery is executed regardless of the operation mode, as in the modification 11. That is, the probability of winning the additional lottery is the same regardless of whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. On the other hand, in the special role C, even in the AT mode, the advantage of the additional lottery differs depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Although it is possible to win an additional prize when operated in one operation mode, it is set not to win an additional prize when operated in the second operation mode. Although the specific processing in this case is omitted in the figure, for example, in the special roles A and B, an additional lottery is performed so that the additional winning can be obtained in the AT addition processing in FIGS. 33 and the like. If it is a special role C, it is preferable to perform an additional lottery so that the additional winning can be won according to the operation mode in the stop AT addition processing in FIG. 78 and the like.

Then, as the push order notification effect in the AT mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the second operation mode is performed for the special roles A and B. On the other hand, for the special combination C, if the special combination C is operated in the first operation mode based on the addition pre-determination process of FIG. 81 or the like and the addition is won, the push order notification corresponding to the first operation mode is notified. On the other hand, if the addition is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the second operation mode is performed.

In this way, by making the content of the processing related to the instruction function different depending on the special role, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to which special role is won, and to raise the expectation when the push order notification effect occurs. It can be made different according to the operation order indicated by the push order notification effect.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, the special combination A and B are added and won with a probability of 30% in the AT addition process at the start, and the special combination C is the first operation mode in the AT addition process at the stop. Assuming that the winning is added with a probability of 30% of the time, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), in the special combination A and the special combination B, each of the push order notification effects of each operation order corresponding to the second operation mode is performed. The expectation of additional winning is the same, and it can be expected that about 30% of the push order notification effects that can occur triggered by the special roles A and B will be additional winning. On the other hand, for the special combination C, when the push order notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first operation mode occurs, there is a 100% probability that the player will be added and won, but the push corresponding to the other operation order will be won. If a forward notification effect occurs, there is a 0% chance that the player will win the prize. By doing so, the degree of expectation of additional winning will differ greatly depending on the content indicated by the push order notification effect, and the degree of attention to the push order notification effect can be suitably increased.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description contents of each embodiment and each modification described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied.

(1) In the special role winning game, the privilege when operated in the first operation mode and the privilege when operated in the second operation mode are not limited to the above. That is, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the 33rd small winning combination and the 9th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established, one medal is paid out, and the operation is performed in the second operation mode. In this case, the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established and eight medals are paid out. However, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, more medals are paid out. It may be a configuration in which one medal is paid out or a configuration in which more than one medal is paid out, or a configuration in which a prize is not established and a dropout occurs. At least, it may be set so that the privilege (number of medals) is smaller than that when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Then, when operated in the second operation mode, a configuration in which more than eight medals are paid out or a configuration in which less than eight medals are paid out may be used.

Further, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the gaming state does not shift or shifts to the first state, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the game state does not shift or shifts to the first state. It may be configured to shift to the second state which is advantageous for the player. For example, the first state or the second state is set as the RT state in which the probability of winning the re-game is improved, and the probability of winning the re-game is higher in the second state than in the first state, or the RT state is concerned. It may be configured to increase the number of continuous games or increase the continuous rate. Further, the bonus state in which the small winning combination winning probability is different may be set as the second state, and the bonus state in which the advantage of the bonus state is lower than the bonus state as the second state may be set as the first state.

In any case, the privilege given when the operation is performed in the second operation mode is more advantageous to the player than the privilege given when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. Just do it.

(2) In the special role winning game, the processing related to the instruction function when operated in the first operation mode and the processing related to the instruction function when operated in the second operation mode are not limited to the above. For example, although the AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is operated, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is higher in the first operation mode, and the second operation mode. The AT mode may have a lower configuration, and if the AT mode transition is won, the first operation mode is more advantageous than the second operation mode (the number of games is large, the number of sets is large, and the set continuation rate). It may be configured so that it is easy to shift to (high, easy to add and win, etc.). Further, the first operation mode may have a configuration in which it is easier to win the additional prize than the second operation mode, and the case where the additional prize is won in the first operation mode is more than the case where the additional prize is won in the second operation mode. The number of additional games and the number of additional sets at the time of winning may be large. Further, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are performed, while when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, only the CZ mode transition lottery is performed. Only the advantage of processing related to the instruction function, such as performing the AT mode transition lottery when operated in the first operation mode and performing the CZ mode transition lottery when operated in the second operation mode. However, the type of processing may be different.

The AT mode in which the operation in the first operation mode is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the case of the operation in the second operation mode, and the AT mode is changed in the wake of the first operation mode. The AT mode, which shifts with the second operation mode as an opportunity, may be more advantageous to the player. In addition, the case where the operation is performed in the first operation mode is easier to win than the case where the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and the AT mode addition triggered by the first operation mode is used. However, the AT mode addition triggered by the second operation mode may be configured to be more advantageous to the player, such as a large number of additional games or a large number of sets. In these cases, the first operation mode is better than the second operation mode when the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery and the advantage of the transition AT mode, the winning probability of the additional lottery and the additional advantage at the time of winning are taken into consideration. It is also good to have a configuration that is advantageous for the player.

(3) When the game is operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the first privilege is given and the process related to the instruction function is executed in the first process, while the operation is performed in the second operation mode. If so, the second privilege is granted and the processing related to the instruction function is the difference in the advantage between the first privilege and the second privilege in the configuration in which the second processing is executed, and the first processing and the second processing. The relationship with the difference in advantage with is not limited to the above. That is, in the above, one medal is paid out as the first privilege, eight medals are paid out as the second privilege, the AT mode transition is won with a high probability as the first processing, and the second processing is as the second processing. Using a configuration such as not winning the AT mode transition, the player is set to be more advantageous when operating in the first operation mode when aiming for the AT mode transition. This is changed, for example, the difference in the advantage between the first privilege and the second privilege is made larger than the above, and the difference in the advantage between the first process and the second process is made smaller than the above. Therefore, in aiming at the transition to the AT mode, it may be advantageous to operate in the second operation mode and aim at the ceiling rather than in the first operation mode.

(4) In the special role winning game, the number of games up to the ceiling (ceiling counter) is subtracted when the game is operated in the first operation mode, while the number of games up to the ceiling (ceiling counter) is subtracted when the game is operated in the second operation mode. Although the number of games is not subtracted, the number of games up to the ceiling may be added when the game is operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the number of games to be added is a uniform number of games. It may be present, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery or the like. Further, when the game is operated in the second operation mode, the subtraction of the number of games up to the ceiling may not be performed not only for the game but also for a specific number (for example, 5) of games thereafter, and the subtraction may be performed. A specific number may be determined by lottery. In the case of a configuration in which the number of games to be added or the number of games not to be subtracted is determined by lottery, the number of additional games to be easily selected or the number of games to be subtracted may differ depending on the set value. The configuration may be such that a small number of addition games or a small number of subtraction stop games can be easily selected.

(5) An example in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode are distinguished by the type of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the first stop operation and the operation timing thereof, and the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the first operation mode. An example in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode are distinguished by the type is shown, and the first stop operation is set to be the branch timing of both operation modes, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed. Both operation modes may be distinguished by the types of the stop switches 42 to 44 and their operation timings, or both operation modes are distinguished by the types of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the second stop operation and the third stop operation. In these cases, the distinct second stop operation and the third stop operation may be applied to each of the above inventions as branch timings of both operation modes.

(6) The ratio of winning the AT mode transition triggered by the special role was set to about half of the ratio of winning the AT mode transition triggered by other results. This is just an example, and the AT mode is triggered by the special role. The percentage of transition winners may be lower or higher. In addition, in the normal mode, the rate of winning the AT mode transition is set lower than others, and in the CZ mode, the rate of winning the AT mode transition is set higher than the others. It may be reversed.

(7) The advantage of the AT mode to be transferred may be different depending on whether the AT mode transition is won due to a special role or the AT mode transition is won due to another result. If the AT mode transition is won with the combination as an opportunity, the AT mode transition may be changed to the AT mode that is more advantageous to the player than if the AT mode transition is won with other results, or vice versa. Is also good.

(8) The advantage of the AT mode when reaching the ceiling and the AT mode which shifts by winning the AT mode transition lottery before reaching the ceiling may be different, and the AT mode when reaching the ceiling shifts before reaching. By making the configuration more advantageous than the AT mode based on the lottery, in the game in which the special role is won near the ceiling, the AT mode transition is performed in the second operation mode rather than the AT mode transition lottery in the first operation mode. It is possible to realize a playability in which both operation modes at the time of winning a special role are selected in relation to the number of ceiling games, such that it is advantageous for the player not to receive the lottery.

(9) The production mode of each game in the CZ mode is not limited to the above. At least, by adopting a complete notification type production mode in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in each game, the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is notified in the game in which the special role is won. The significance of doing this is enhanced. For example, in the bomb production, switching from the bomb image BP to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP may be performed based on the operation of the predetermined operation unit by the player. The predetermined operation unit may be an effect switch 66 for effect. In the case of the configuration in which the switching from the bomb image BP to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP is performed based on the operation by the player as described above, at least in the next game of the game in which the bomb production is started, the start lever 41 It is preferable that the above switching is performed before the operation of the above is performed, and the above switching is performed based on the betting operation of the next game such as the first credit insertion switch 56 and the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45. It may be configured to perform the above. By the way, also in the above embodiment, the betting operation of the next game such as the first credit insertion switch 56 and the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45 is performed after the bomb production is started and before switching to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP. In the case of a failure, it is preferable to use a configuration in which switching to a scheduled image, notification of AT winning, etc. are performed based on the above betting operation.

(10) In a game in which a special role is won during the CZ mode, if the AT mode is not won, the result notification of the AT mode transition lottery of the game may be carried over to the next game or later. In this case, since the AT mode is not won, the AT mode is not started from the next game of the game in which the special role is won.

(11) The AT mode winning notification in the CZ mode may be executed before the doublet effect after the third stop operation. In this case, the result notification of the AT mode transition lottery based on the result other than the special role can be executed after the operation of the start lever 41, and in the case of the special role, the preliminary determination process is used. It is possible to notify the result of the AT mode transition lottery before the third stop operation. Then, the timing of the result notification of the AT mode transition lottery based on the special combination may be the same as the timing of the result notification of the AT mode transition lottery based on the result other than the special combination.

(12) In the doublet effect to be executed when the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the type of the character of the number to be displayed, the lottery result of this game, and the lottery result that triggered the AT mode transition winning. May be associated with. For example, when a specific role is used as an opportunity to win the AT mode transition, odd-numbered characters are likely to be displayed as doublet effects, and the normal role such as normal rips A to C is used as an opportunity to win the AT mode transition. In this case, even-numbered characters are easily displayed as doublet effects, and when the AT mode transition is won due to a special role, characters with predetermined numbers (for example, 0) are easily displayed as doublet effects. May be. In this case, it is also possible to grasp the lottery result of this game from the character that stops in the left fluctuation area SP1 at the time of the first stop, and in relation to the character of that number, the degree of expectation of the AT mode transition lottery and this time. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of the AT mode transition lottery in relation to the operation mode performed, and it is expected that the game will be greatly improved.

In addition, depending on the pre-determination process at the time of winning the special combination, there are cases where the AT mode transition is won in the first operation mode and cases where the AT mode transition is not won even in the first operation mode, at the time of the first stop. The character of the number to be stopped may be different. That is, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won with a specific role as a trigger, the characters with odd numbers are likely to be displayed as doublet effects, and when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger. Is configured so that a character with a predetermined number is easily displayed as a doublet effect, and if the AT mode transition is won in the first operation mode, the character with the predetermined number is stopped in the left fluctuation region SP1. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition is not won even in the first operation mode, the character having an odd number may be stopped in the left variable region SP1. As described above, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the stop result at the time of winning the special combination and the stop result of the cherries A to C among the specific combinations are common. Even if the AT mode transition is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning, and even if the character with an odd number stops in the left fluctuation region SP1, the cherries A to C are used as an opportunity. It is possible to expect that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and it is possible to maintain the expectation for the AT mode transition winning.

(13) Regarding the special role and the push order bell that can have the same stop roll, the special role is configured to be easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the push order bell, but the push order bell is easier than the special role. The configuration may be such that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery, or even in the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the push order bell may be configured to be easier to win the AT mode transition lottery.

(14) The pre-determination process may not be executed in the normal mode, but may be performed only in the CZ mode. Further, it may be set so that the pre-determination process may or may not be performed in the CZ mode, and the CZ mode in which the pre-determination process is performed and the CZ mode in which the pre-determination process is not performed at the time of transition to the CZ mode are determined by lottery or the like. May be. For example, when the mode shifts to the CZ mode based on the cherry A, the pre-judgment process is performed in the CZ mode, but when the shift to the CZ mode based on the cherry B, the pre-judgment process is performed in the CZ mode. Depending on the lottery result (the lottery result in the game that won the CZ mode transition) that triggered the transition to the CZ mode, it is determined whether or not to perform the pre-judgment process during the CZ mode. It may be configured. Further, the player may be able to select in advance whether or not to perform the pre-determination process.

(15) When it is specified in the pre-judgment process that the AT mode transition is won by operating in the first operation mode when the special combination is won, it is before the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, for example, as an effect at the start, a notification that the AT mode transition is won or a notification that the possibility is high may be performed. By doing so, when the notification is generated, it is considered that the operation is performed more carefully in the first operation mode, and it is a pleasure to confirm the AT mode transition winning by operating the own stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make you feel. In this case, the AT mode transition was won in the start AT lottery process in the same notification mode or similar notification mode as the notification that the AT mode transition is won or the notification that the possibility is high. It is preferable that the configuration is such that notification of the case can be performed.

(16) When it is specified in the pre-judgment process that the AT mode transition is won when the special combination is won, the notification (for example, FIG. 70 (c)) for selecting the first operation mode and the second operation mode is executed. It may be configured to be used. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression of winning the AT mode transition winning by the operation of the first operation mode of the player, and it can be useful for improving the interest of the game. In this case, the first operation mode can be changed by allowing the AT mode transition winning in both the case of being operated in the first operation mode and the case of being operated in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special combination. There is a possibility of winning the AT mode transition not only when selected but also when the second operation mode is selected, giving the impression of winning the AT mode transition winning not only by one's own operation but also by selection. Can be done. In the above configuration, it is preferable that the case of being operated in the first operation mode is more likely to win the AT mode transition than the case of being operated in the second operation mode. Further, in this case, the AT mode that shifts when operated in the second operation mode is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the AT mode that shifts when operated in the first operation mode. , The significance of selecting the second operation mode can also be generated, and the interest of the game to be selected can be improved.

(17) Although the navigation mode is managed on the display control device 81 side, it may be managed on the main control device 101 side. That is, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode when the special combination is won, the game playability to be operated in the second operation mode is managed by the main control device 101. The main control device 101 may be configured to execute the navigation mode process of 75 and the specific notification process of FIG. 76. In this case, as a specific notification effect, for example, in the case of a push order bell, the push order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination may be executed, and the pushing order notification by the instruction monitor 68 may be performed. May also be executed.

(18) The start and end triggers of the navigation mode are not limited to the above. As a start trigger, if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery that is performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, triggered by a special role) is not won instead of or in addition to the advantageous section transition, the start trigger may be It starts when the number of non-winning AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of games reaches a predetermined number (preferably the number of games in front of the ceiling). It may be a trigger, or it may be configured to shift to the navigation mode (through a lottery or the like) as a part of these start triggers. Further, the end trigger may be replaced with or in addition to the AT mode transition, and the end trigger may be the end of the advantageous section, and the number of games and the number of occurrences of the specific notification effect after the transition to the navigation mode (triggered by a special role). When the number of non-winnings of the AT mode transition lottery) reaches a predetermined number, the end trigger may be set, and the navigation mode may be terminated (through a lottery or the like) as a part of these end triggers.

(19) The configuration is such that a specific notification effect can be generated by shifting to the navigation mode, but when the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the specific notification effect. In this case, for example, even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game, the AT mode is not won, and even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the current special role winning game, the AT mode is not won. In the case of non-winning, that is, when the AT mode is not won twice in a row due to the special role, a specific notification effect is generated. With reference to the result, it may be configured to determine whether or not a specific notification effect is generated at the time of winning the special role this time. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not a specific notification effect is generated at the time of the current special role winning according to the operation mode at the time of the previous special role winning. For example, in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game. After the operation, the AT mode is not won, and if the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, a specific notification effect is generated, while the previous special role is won. If the AT mode is not won after operating in the second operation mode in the game, and if the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, a specific notification effect is displayed. It may be configured not to occur.

(20) Transition to Navi Mode Although there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the lottery, the configuration may be such that the transition to the navigation mode is performed with a uniform probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the transition may differ depending on the lottery result of the game in which the navigation mode transition lottery is performed. For example, the push order bell may be triggered rather than the navigation mode transition lottery triggered by a specific role or a special role. The navigation mode transition lottery may be configured to be more likely to win the navigation mode transition, or vice versa.

(21) In the navigation mode, if the special combination is won and the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the specific notification effect is performed. In place of or in addition to the effect, an effect of operating in the second operation mode (for example, in the case of a push order bell, a push order notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination) is performed. It may be configured. In this case, the case where the specific notification effect is performed and the case where the effect of operating in the second operation mode is performed may be mixed, and for example, these effects may be alternately executed. , Which effect is to be executed may be determined by lottery.

(22) Processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as the stop AT lottery process and the stop addition lottery process, is executed after the medal payout of the game is completed. Although the explanation has been made on the premise of this, it may be after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and it may be before the start of medal payout, or after the start of medal payout and before the completion. good.

(23) In the special role winning game, a freeze effect may be generated after the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are completed. In this case, before the start of the freeze effect or during the freeze effect, processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as the AT lottery process when stopped and the additional lottery process when stopped, is executed. It may be configured to be used. Then, the result of the AT lottery process at the time of stop or the additional lottery process at the time of stop may be notified during the freeze effect or during the freeze effect.

(24) When the push order bell is won except in the AT mode, the push order bell group notification is executed on the instruction monitor 68, but such a configuration is not essential and the push order bell group notification is performed when the push order bell is won. It may be configured not to execute. In addition, when the push order bell is won, the lottery result command for the push order bell group is output. However, except in the AT mode, the lottery result command is output even if the push order bell is won. It may be configured not to. At least, other than the AT mode, the display control device 81 may not be able to specify an advantageous operation order (operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination) at the time of winning the push order bell.

(25) When the push order bell is won, the lottery result command for the push order bell group is output, but the lottery result command for the push order bell group is also output at the time of other lottery results. May be good. That is, the lottery results are grouped into specific roles, special roles, and other normal roles (normal bells A to C, push order bells), and the lottery result commands for these specific roles and the lottery result commands for special roles are used. The lottery result command for a normal combination may be output to the display control device 81.

(26) In the special role winning game before the transition to the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 is configured to notify the special role, but the instruction monitor 68 executes the notification that the operation should be performed in the first operation mode. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, for example, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which "9" is executed as a notification for a special role as in the above embodiment, the push order bell is used as the operation order for first operating the left stop switch 42. If so, the configuration may be such that "1" or "2" indicating the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination winning or the second small winning combination winning is displayed. The same applies to the special role A notification, the special role B notification, and the special role C notification. When the special role A notification is performed, the operation order corresponding to the first small role winning or the second small winning combination is indicated by "1". "" Or "2" may be displayed, and when the special role B notification is performed, "3" or "4" indicating the operation order corresponding to the third small role winning or the fourth small winning combination is displayed. It may be configured to display "5" or "6" indicating the operation order corresponding to the 5th small winning combination winning or the 6th small winning combination winning when the special combination C notification is performed. However, in the case of these special roles A to C, it is preferable to control the instruction monitor 68 so that the push order notification corresponding to the same operation order as the push order notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed.

(27) When the display control device 81 side executes the push order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode at the time of winning the special combination before the transition to the AT mode, the push order notification effect is distinguished from the case of the push order bell. However, the push order notification effect may be performed in the same notification mode as the push order bell, or the push order notification effect may be performed in the same notification mode as the push order bell and the push order notification in a different notification mode from the push order bell. There may be cases where the production is performed.

(28) When the push order bell is won in the AT mode, a push order notification command indicating the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination is displayed from the main control device 101 as the push order notification command. Although the configuration is set to output to, the command corresponding to the first small combination to the sixth small combination may be output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. Further, a command indicating which of the push order bells is the lottery result may be output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. In these cases, in order to operate in the second operation mode when the special combination is won and to establish the first small combination to the sixth small combination winning, the corresponding command (first small combination to the sixth small combination). It is preferable to output the corresponding command and the command indicating the result of the push order bell corresponding to the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination) from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. Then, it is preferable that the display control device 81 stores the table of FIG. 23 so that the operation order to be notified can be specified based on the received command.

(29) When the number of ceiling games on the display is reached, the precursor effect is determined according to the deviation until the ceiling counter becomes 0, but the precursor effect is determined after the ceiling counter becomes 0. It may be configured.

(30) In the configuration in which the precursor effect is determined according to the deviation until the ceiling counter reaches 0 when the number of ceiling games on the display is reached, the deviation reaches the number of games of the precursor effect provided in advance. In some cases, it may be configured to set a precursor effect. That is, in the above embodiment, the precursor mode in the normal state is set to 40 games at the maximum, but when the number of ceiling games on the display is reached, if the deviation until the ceiling counter becomes 0 is within 40 games. When the number of ceiling games on the display is reached, the precursor effect is set, and if the deviation is more than 40 games, the precursor effect is set when the game is digested until the deviation is within 40 games. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of patterns of precursory effects to be memorized.

(31) The number of ceiling games on the display is configured to be updated regardless of the operation mode when the special combination is won, but it may or may not be updated depending on the operation mode, and the second operation mode may be used. The update may be performed in a part of the case where the ceiling counter is not subtracted by the operation, and the update may be performed even when the ceiling counter is not subtracted by the operation in the second operation mode. It may be. Even in these cases, considering the case where a value larger than 1 is subtracted from the ceiling counter by the subtraction value lottery process, the number of ceiling games on the display reaches the ceiling and the ceiling counter becomes 0. There may be a gap with the game.

(32) Even in games other than special roles, the ceiling counter may not be subtracted depending on the operation mode or by lottery.

(33) Although the number of ceiling games is determined by lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games may be set as a uniform number of games (for example, 700 games).

(34) The advantageous section transition lottery is performed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is different depending on the operation mode in the special role winning game. , The advantageous section transition lottery is performed only after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is the same probability (same processing) regardless of the operation mode in the special role winning game. May be. In this case, when a special combination is won in the normal section, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to notify the fact that the special combination has been won. By doing so, regardless of the operation mode of winning the special role, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the operation mode even in the scene where the common processing is performed, and the processing configuration becomes complicated. It is possible to improve the interest while preventing the occurrence of. Even with such a configuration, if the advantageous section transition lottery is performed regardless of the operation mode when the special combination is won, it is advantageous and advantageous to operate in the second operation mode when the special combination is won in the normal section. The operation mode that is advantageous to the section is reversed. By the way, as described above, the effect of notifying that the special role is performed in the scene where the common process is performed regardless of the operation mode of winning the special role can be expected even in the AT mode, and the effect in the AT mode can be expected. The special role winning game may be configured to notify that the special role has been won.

(35) When a plurality of special roles are provided, the types of special roles are not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types. In this case, the relationship is such that the first operation mode in one special role becomes the second operation mode in the other special role, and the first operation mode in the other special role becomes the second operation mode in one special role. When a game that continues to be operated in the first operation mode in one special role is performed, the other special roles are operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are used. You can expect the effect of operating it evenly.

(36) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the first privilege given when one special role is operated in the first operation mode and the first privilege given when the one special role is operated in the second operation mode are given. The second privilege is different from the first privilege given when the other special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second privilege given when the other special role is operated in the second operation mode. You may. In this case, the first privilege is different from each other, the second privilege is the same, the first privilege is the same, the second privilege is different from each other, and the first privilege and the second privilege are different from each other. Each of the above may have a different configuration. Further, in the configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only the first privilege and the second privilege are all different, but also the first privilege and the first privilege for the second special role are the same. On the other hand, the benefits of some special roles are the same, such that the first privilege for the third special role is different from that of the first special role and the second special role, while other special roles. The relationship may be different from the privilege of the role. In these cases, the first privilege and the second privilege may be different from other special roles, but the difference between the advantage of the first privilege and the second privilege (for example, the number of medals paid out) may be common.

(37) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the first process relating to the instruction function executed when one special role is operated in the first operation mode and the case where it is operated in the second operation mode. When the second process related to the instruction function to be executed is operated in the first operation mode for another special role, the first process related to the instruction function to be executed and when the second process is operated in the second operation mode. It may be different from the second process regarding the instruction function to be executed. In this case, the first processes are different from each other, the second processes are the same, the first processes are the same, the second processes are different from each other, and the first processes and the second processes are different from each other. Each of the above may have a different configuration. Further, in the configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only the first process and the second process are all different, but also the first process for the first special role and the second special role is the same. On the other hand, the processing of some special roles is the same, such that the first processing for the third special role is different from that of the first special role and the second special role, while other special roles. The relationship may be different from the processing of the winning combination. In these cases, the first process and the second process are different from other special roles, but the difference between the advantages of the first process and the second process (for example, the winning probability of the AT mode) is common. good.

(38) As a special role, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and the first process related to the instruction function is executed, in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode. When it is operated, a second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given, and a second process that is a process related to the instruction function and is more disadvantageous than the first process is executed. When the operation is performed not only in the mode and the second operation mode but also in the third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the third privilege is given and the third process related to the instruction function is performed. A special role to be performed may be provided. In this case, the third privilege may have a different configuration from both the first privilege and the second privilege, and while different from the first privilege, it has the same configuration as the second privilege and the same as the first privilege. On the other hand, the configuration may be different from the second privilege, the third processing may be different from both the first processing and the second processing, and the configuration is different from the first processing but the same as the second processing. The configuration is the same as that of the first process, but may be different from that of the second process. In any case, the set of the third privilege and the third process may not have the same contents as the set of the first privilege and the first process and the set of the second privilege and the second process. Some contents may be the same. The advantage for the player differs depending on that the content of the third privilege is different from the content of the first privilege or the second privilege and the content of the third process is different from the content of the first process or the second process. It is preferable that the profit obtained by the set of the third privilege and the third processing is different from the profit obtained by the set of the first privilege and the first processing, and the set of the second privilege and the second processing. The configuration should be different from the profit obtained in.

More specifically, for example, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the 33rd small winning combination is established and one medal is paid out, and the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 50% as the first processing. When the AT mode transition lottery is executed and the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the first small winning combination to the sixth small winning combination are established and eight medals are paid out, and the second processing is 0%. In the configuration executed in the AT mode transition lottery that wins the AT mode transition with the probability of, if the operation is performed in the third operation mode, the 7th small winning combination or the 8th small winning combination is established and 3 medals There may be a configuration in which the payout occurs and the AT mode transition lottery, which is the AT mode transition winning, is executed with a probability of 25% as the third process.

(39) The configuration is such that different small winning combination prizes can be established depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode when the special combination is won. When the operation is performed in, a predetermined re-game prize is established, while when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, a predetermined small winning combination prize is established, or the operation is performed in the first operation mode. In this case, a predetermined small winning combination is established, while a predetermined replay winning is established when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, or a predetermined replay prize is established when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. While the small winning combination is established, the predetermined bonus winning is established when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and neither of the results is established when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. , When the operation is performed in the second operation mode, a predetermined small winning combination, replay, and bonus winning may be established.

(40) The configuration is such that the processing related to the instruction function is executed after the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are completed when the special combination is won, but the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 are performed when the special combination is won. It may be configured to execute the processing related to the instruction function after the completion.

For example, in the AT lottery processing at the start of the special combination winning, when the first lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed and the first lottery is won and the operation is performed in the first operation mode. While confirming the transition to AT mode such as setting the AT mode winning flag in the stop AT lottery process, if the first lottery at the start is not won, the operation is performed in the first operation mode. Even if it is done, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop AT lottery process, and if the first lottery at the start is won, it is operated in the second operation mode. Even if this is the case, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop AT lottery process, and if the first lottery at the start is not won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Even so, the AT mode winning flag may not be set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop.

Further, in the AT lottery processing at the start of the special combination winning, the first lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the result of the first lottery is the first result, in the first operation mode. If it is operated, the transition to AT mode such as setting the AT mode winning flag in the stop AT lottery process is confirmed, while the result of the first lottery at the start is different from the first result. If it is a result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop AT lottery process even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the result of the first lottery at the start is the first. In the case of 2 results, if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the transition to the AT mode such as setting the AT mode winning flag in the stop AT lottery process is confirmed, while the start time. If the result of the first lottery is the second result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the stop AT lottery process even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode. May be.

(41) In the configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the winning probabilities of each special role in each game are described as the same probability, but the winning probabilities may be different. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which special roles A to C are provided, the winning probabilities of special roles A and B are the same, but the winning probabilities of special roles C are different. May be different from each other, or the winning probabilities of any of the special roles A to C may be different from each other.

(42) The winning probability of the special role may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, when shifting to the RT state in which the probability of winning the re-game is improved, the probability of winning the special role may change (become higher or lower) as compared with the normal state before the transition. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the winning probability of the special role A is higher than that of the special role B in the first state, while the winning probability of the special role B is lower than that of the special role A, and the winning probability of the special role B is lower than that of the special role A. The winning probability of B may be higher than that of the special role A, while the winning probability of the special role A may be lower than that of the special role B.

(43) Even in the configuration in which a plurality of special combinations are provided, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be distinguished not only by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 but also by the operation timing.

(44) The AT lottery or the like based on the special role is executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (processing for the AT lottery when stopped, etc.), and the AT lottery or the like based on other results is operated by the stop switches 42 to 44. It is configured to be executed before (when the start lever 41 is operated, AT lottery processing at the start, etc.), but even if the result is other than the special role, after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (AT lottery processing at the stop). ), The AT lottery or the like may be executed, or even if it is a special role, the AT lottery or the like may be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (the AT lottery process at the start). Even in these cases, for example, the effect control as the result notification of the AT lottery in the CZ mode is based on the AT lottery after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (CZ effect setting process at the time of stop) and before the operation. It is preferable that the configuration is different from that based on the AT lottery (CZ effect setting process at the start).

(45) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals do not increase or decrease in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. The number of medals may be increased, or the number of medals may be decreased. In this case, the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state may be at least as long as the net increase number is larger than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(46) The player is allowed to execute each process related to the instruction function by playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 2-bet game instead of the 3-bet game, or by establishing the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize. The configuration is such that the state is changed from the state in which the game is played to the state in which the game is restricted. May be.

(47) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball ejection rate and setting 6 has the highest ball ejection rate. However, depending on the set value, the ball ejection rate (game medium) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in the settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases in a short time and the amount of balls ejected decreases in a long time, and in the settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The decrease in a predetermined amount may be shorter than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the ball output hardly occurs. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(48) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, a reel and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to one line in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be five lines.

(49) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball throwing and ball paying out function such as a pachinko machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type gaming machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

(50) In the above embodiment, a gaming machine of a type in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is exemplified by inserting a medal as a game medium and setting the number of bets to start the game. However, this does not deny a medalless type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a virtual gaming medium (predetermined gaming value) can be used to set the number of bets on the game so that the game can be started, and the above-mentioned privilege corresponding to the winning of the game is described above. It is preferable to use a configuration in which a virtual game medium (predetermined game value) corresponding to a predetermined number of medals is given. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or the information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the above-mentioned pachinko machine may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which the game balls are paid out, but also an enclosed type pachinko machine in which the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, it may be configured to notify information indicating the number of prize balls.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
Equipped with
In a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific processing means executes the first specific process as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed or the specific process is performed as the specific process. It is set not to run,
In the special game, the specific notification means (stop CZ effect setting by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means is executed. A gaming machine characterized by having a function (function to execute processing).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and as a specific process related to the mode notification function. While the first specific process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function. A special result is set, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, while the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process. In the case of, the player is entrusted with the selection of the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) of the mode notification function. It is possible to realize a high level of playability.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the game in which the privilege given by such an operation mode or the special result in which the specific process is different is won, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is performed after the operation of the stop operation means is executed. Is enabled, the result of the specific processing based on the special result is notified in the game in which the special result is won. Therefore, even a so-called complete notification type gaming machine that notifies the result of a specific process in each game can set a special result, which can be greatly useful for improving the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The specific processing means is
A means capable of executing a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition, AT addition winning, ceiling counter subtraction) that facilitates execution of the aspect notification by the aspect notification means is provided. ,
It is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur when the first specific process is executed than when the second specific process is executed.
The specific notification means executes the specific notification as a notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event.
When the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means is a corresponding result (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition winning) corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific event control means (mainly) that causes the specific event. The process of setting the precursor mode by the control device 101) is provided.
When the result of the specific process triggered by the special result becomes the corresponding result, the specific event control means causes the specific event in the next game of the special game that has the special result. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a means capable of (a function of executing a process of setting the number of precursor games to 0 by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the first specific process in which a specific event is likely to occur is executed when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the specific event occurs more than in the case of the first operation mode. In the configuration in which the second specific process that is unlikely to occur is executed, the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is executed in the game that has the special result. Then, since a specific event occurs in the next game of the special game that has the special result, the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is executed in the game that has the response result that the specific event occurs. The need to do is increased. By doing so, it is known that the specific event will occur even if the configuration is such that the specific process is executed after the operation of the stop operation means is performed and the specific event can occur in the next game. Since it is possible to prevent a specific event from occurring without being performed, it is possible to suppress unexpected hits of the specific event, and the period during which the specific notification can be executed is more limited, the player's consciousness is during that period. It is possible to concentrate and raise the degree of attention to the game to the utmost limit.

Feature A3. When the specific event occurs by the specific event control means, the game (AT mode) after the game in which the specific event occurs is more than the game (CZ mode, normal mode) before the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that it is a game having a high degree of advantage for the player.

According to the above configuration, the advantage for the player is high with the special game in which the result of the specific process triggered by the special result is the corresponding result, so that it is highly necessary to perform the specific notification in the special game. Become. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature A1 in such a situation, it can be expected that the excellent effect of the feature A1 is more preferably played.

In addition, regarding the expression "highly advantageous for the player", it is expressed as "there are many unit expected benefits (net increase number) that can be expected per game as the benefits given by the privilege granting means". Alternatively, it may be expressed that "the result of the specific processing tends to be an advantageous result for the player".

Feature A4. Based on the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means, the execution frequency of the aspect notification by the aspect notification means after the next game of the special game is higher than the execution frequency in the games up to the special game. The game according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that it is provided with means (a function of executing a process for shifting to the AT mode by the main control device 101). Machine.

According to the above configuration, based on the result of the specific process triggered by the special result, the execution frequency of the mode notification becomes high in the game after the next game of the special game that has the special result. Therefore, the player can establish a desired result winning by following the mode notification, and can efficiently acquire the privilege based on the desired result winning. Then, since the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is performed in the special game, the specific notification will be notified at least before the execution frequency of the mode notification becomes high, and the game It is possible to prevent a person from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature A5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result can be established, while the stop operation means is the first operation mode. When the operation is performed in a second operation mode different from that of the above, the second result prize can be established in which the privilege given by the privilege granting means is different from the case where the first result prize is established. The result (push order bell) is set,
The aspect notification means is characterized in that the operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode can be executed as the mode notification based on the operation of the start operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A4.

According to the above configuration, when the next game of the special game in which the special result is won is the mode result winning and the mode notification is performed based on the mode result, at least the result of the specific process triggered by the special result is supported. If the specific notification to be performed is executed in the special game, the aspect notification executed at the start of the game in which the mode result is won and the specific notification are less likely to overlap. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by duplication of notifications.

In particular, in a configuration such as feature A4 in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher from the next game of the special game, the mode notification is performed at the start of the next game of the game that has won the special result as described above. There is a high possibility that the specific notification will be executed in the special game.

Feature A6. The specific processing means is a third as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (a function of executing AT lottery processing at the start by the main control device 101).
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the second specific notification means (at the start of the display control device 81) capable of executing the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process by at least the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that it has a function of executing a CZ effect setting process).

According to the above configuration, in the game which is the specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means. In such a case, the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process is performed in the game. Can be easily done. That is, it can be said that the specific notification is set to be executed at a specific timing in accordance with the notification in the case of the specific result, and by doing so, the specific processing is performed according to the lottery result of the lottery processing. It is possible not to give a sense of incongruity that the notification timings of the results are different, and it is also possible to eliminate the fact that the result of the specific processing is overlooked from the difference in the notification timings.

In relation to the "second specific notification means", the "specific notification means" in the feature A1 may be paraphrased as the "first specific notification means".

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the second specific notification means can execute notification (tempai effect) corresponding to the result of the third specific process at a timing prior to the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, in the game which is the specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means, and the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process is executed at the timing before the specific timing. To. That is, when the first specific process or the second specific process is executed as the specific process, it is premised that the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means. When the specific result is won, the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process as the specific process is executed before the specific timing. By doing so, the timing at which the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is executed is diversified, and the result of the specific processing is predicted by the relationship between the lottery result and the notification timing that trigger the specific processing. Games can also be realized, which can contribute to improving the interest of games.

Feature A8. The specific processing means is
A means capable of executing a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition, AT addition winning, ceiling counter subtraction) that facilitates execution of the aspect notification by the aspect notification means is provided. ,
The specific process in the case of the special result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific process in the case of the predetermined specific result (for example, cherry A). The gaming machine according to the feature A6 or the feature A7.

According to the above configuration, the case where the specific process such as the first specific process or the second specific process is performed based on the special result is better than the case where the specific process such as the third specific process is performed based on the specific result. However, specific events are likely to occur. Therefore, the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is overwhelmingly easier to be executed in the game in the case of the game in which the specific result is won, but the notification that it leads to the specific event requested by the player is special. As a result, the winning game is more likely to occur. Therefore, by making the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process executed in the game in which the specific process is performed even if it is a special result, even the game which is the specific result corresponds to the result of the specific process. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the notification.

Feature A9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the other specific result (normal lip A to C, chance eyes A to C, cherry A to C, watermelon) is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A6 to the feature A8, which is set to.

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of the special result is lower than that of the other specific result. Therefore, if the timing of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is adjusted to the special result side, the other specific result is specified. In the case of the result, inconveniences such as not being notified easily after the specific process is executed are likely to occur. In that respect, by notifying the result of the specific processing according to other specific results, it is possible to confuse the fact that it is a special result with other specific results, and it corresponds to the result of the specific processing from the notification timing. It is possible to prevent the content of the notification from being overlooked and to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the notification.

Feature A10. The specific processing means is a third as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (a function of executing AT lottery processing at the start by the main control device 101).
It is set that the case where the first specific process is executed triggered by the special result is more advantageous to the player than the case where the third specific process is executed triggered by the predetermined specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A9.

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the first specific process which is more advantageous than the third specific process executed regardless of the operation mode when the other specific result is won is performed. Will be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the operation mode at the time of winning the special result more carefully, and it is possible to make the person want to know the result of the first specific process based on the operation earlier. , The significance of performing specific notification in a special game that has a special result as in feature A1 is enhanced.

Feature A11. The specific processing means is a third as the specific processing before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (a function of executing AT lottery processing at the start by the main control device 101).
It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the third specific process triggered by the predetermined specific result than to execute the second specific process triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A10.

According to the above configuration, if the operation is performed in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the second specific process which is more disadvantageous than the third specific process executed regardless of the operation mode when the other specific result is won is performed. Will be done. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the operation mode at the time of winning the special result more carefully. In particular, from the relationship with the feature A10, it is possible to make people want to know the result of the second specific process based on the operation earlier, and the specific notification is sent in the special game that has a special result like the feature A1. The significance of doing it is enhanced.

Feature A12. The advance notification means (tempai effect or identification in the start CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the advance notification (tempai effect, final effect, or specific notification effect) corresponding to the result of the specific process. It is equipped with a function to execute a process to perform a notification effect and a function to execute a process to perform a final effect when a cherry is won.
The advance notification means is a means capable of executing the advance notification at a timing prior to the specific timing in the special game (tempai effect triggered by a special role in the start CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A11, which is provided with a function of executing a process for performing a specific notification effect.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific process differs depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the destination corresponding to the specific process at a timing before the specific timing at which the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is performed. Since the notification may be performed, the player can detect in advance that the specific notification will be performed, and even if the notification timing is limited, the specific notification can be performed for that period. It becomes possible to secure for a longer period of time, and it becomes possible to make the game production more suitable.

Feature A13. The specific notification means is either an advantageous content that is advantageous to the player or a content notification that includes a non-advantageous content that is more disadvantageous to the player than when the advantageous content is performed, depending on the result of the specific process. Can be executed as the specific notification,
After the advance notification is performed by the advance notification means, the specific notification of the advantageous content may be performed, and after the advance notification is performed by the advance notification means, the non-advantageous content is said. It is set so that specific notification may be performed,
Further, the feature A12 is characterized in that after the advance notification is performed by the advance notification means, the specific notification having the advantageous content is easier to perform than the specific notification having the non-advantageous content. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the advance notification is performed before the execution of the specific process, the specific notification after that may be advantageous content or non-advantageous content, and the advance notification may be performed. Even if it is done, it is less likely that a contradiction will occur in the subsequent specific notification. On top of that, when the advance notification is performed, the content tends to be advantageous, so that it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the advance notification.

Feature A14. After the branch timing (first stop ON operation) in performing the operation of each of the stop operation means which is the operation mode of the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the advance notification means is used. The gaming machine according to the feature A12 or the feature A13, characterized in that the means for enabling the advance notification (a function of executing a process for performing a tempai effect by the display control device 81) is provided.

According to the above configuration, the player cannot determine which operation mode to operate by the advance notification by the advance notification means. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, the second operation is performed so as to acquire the second privilege although the second specific processing is performed if the detected content is not preferable for the player. Although it is conceivable to operate in the mode, by generating the advance notification after the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode as described above, the above-mentioned action is less likely to be performed.

Feature A15. The advance notification before the branch timing (first stop ON operation) for performing the operation of each of the stop operation means as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is to be performed. The feature A12 to the feature A14 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing a process for performing a specific notification effect by the display control device 81) for performing the advance notification by the means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can determine which operation mode to operate by the advance notification by the advance notification means. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, the second operation is performed so as to acquire the second privilege although the second specific processing is performed if the detected content is not preferable for the player. It is conceivable to operate in the mode, and if the detected content is preferable for the player, it is considered that the stop operation means is operated more carefully, and the advance notification is set as the first operation mode and the first as described above. By generating it before the branch timing with the two operation modes, it is possible to efficiently acquire the privilege after determining which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode should be operated by the advance notification. It is possible to realize a novel playability such as, and it is also possible to greatly excite the production for specific notification.

Feature A16. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, the second destination notification means (display control device 81) so as to perform the advance notification or the notification having the same notification mode as the advance notification. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A12 to feature A15, which is provided with a function of executing a process of performing a tempai effect or a specific notification effect when a special role is not won.

According to the above configuration, since the advance notification is generated even if the advance notification is another specific result, the advance notification is less likely to be a marker of the special result. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the game result from the content of the notification, and it is possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature A17. The specific processing means has a configuration in which the specific processing is executed by using the specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) acquired before the specific processing is executed.
When the specific numerical value information is used for the specific process, the result of the specific process can be specified before the specific process is performed. Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A12 to the feature A16, wherein the advance notification is executed based on the specific result of the advance identification means.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is different depending on the operation mode, the result of the first specific process when the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second when the process is operated in the second operation mode. Since the result of the specific process can be specified in advance and the advance notification is performed based on the result previously specified in advance, the reliability of the advance notification can be improved.

Feature A18. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated by the first operation mode, a specific pattern is placed at a specific position of the specific orbital body (left reel 32L) among the orbiting bodies. Is stopped, and the first pattern combination is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (cherry A to C) different from the special result, the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position of the specific orbiter and the first pattern is stopped at the effective position. When the combination and the third pattern combination different from the second pattern combination are stopped, the privilege corresponding to the specific result is given by the privilege giving means.
The advance notification means is a specific means (cherry winning by the display control device 81) capable of executing the advance notification in a situation where the specific pattern is stopped at a specific position of the specific orbiter and the other orbiters are not stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A17, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process for performing a time determination effect.

When a specific pattern stops at a specific position of a specific orbiter, it can be determined from the stop result whether it is based on the specific result or the first operation mode when the special role result is won. Can not. In such a configuration, the advance notification may be performed when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiter, so that the advance notification corresponds to the specific processing based on the specific result. It is not possible to determine whether it corresponds to the first specific process or the second specific process after that, and there are more options for predicting the result when the advance notification is performed. It is possible to suitably increase the attention of the notification and the specific notification.

Feature A19. The specific processing means is a means (main control) capable of executing a third specific process as the specific process before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result. It is equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing at the start by the device 101).
The gaming machine according to feature A18, wherein the specific means executes a notification corresponding to the result of the third specific processing based on the specific result as the advance notification.

According to the above configuration, the third specific process is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as the advance notification when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiter. By doing so, if the scene where the advance notification is performed is a special result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but the content of the advance notification does not conflict. , It is possible to improve the reliability of advance notification.

Feature A20. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the feature A18 is characterized in that the second symbol combination is stopped at the effective position without stopping the specific symbol at the specific position of the specific orbiter. Or the gaming machine according to the feature A19.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position of the specific orbiter, but when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the specific pattern is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impression that the advance notification is executed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the advance notification.

In the above configuration, "the branch timing (first stop ON operation) of which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is used when the operation of each stop operation means is performed. Is set, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position of the specific orbiter at the branch timing by operating in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position of the specific orbiter at the branch timing by operating in the second operation mode. By limiting the configuration in which "another symbol stops", it becomes clearer whether or not the specific symbol stops at the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

Feature A21. A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the number of the orbiting bodies.
The specific processing means executes the first specific processing or the second specific processing after all the operations of the stop operation means are executed.
The specific notification means according to any one of features A1 to A20, characterized in that the specific notification is executed after the first specific process or the second specific process is executed in the special game. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, after all the operations of the plurality of stop operation means are completed, the first specific process and the second specific process are executed to perform the specific notification. With such a configuration, more careful operation of the stop operation means at the time of winning the special result is promoted, and the timing of performing the specific notification in the special game in which the special result is won is more limited. It will be a typical one. As a result, the timings at which attention should be paid to the specific notification are aggregated, and the degree of attention to the specific notification can be suitably increased.

Feature A22. The specific notification means is characterized in that the specific notification is executed before the next game of the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is started. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific notification is executed in the special game in which the special result is won, and the specific notification is not carried over to the next game. With such a configuration, the specific timing at which the specific notification is performed is further limited, and the degree of attention to the specific notification can be suitably increased.

The invention described in the above features A1 to A22 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features A1 to A22, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means for executing mode notification of the first operation mode or an operation mode including the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by an instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101). ,
Advantageous determination means (for example, a function of executing the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process) by the main control device 101 to execute an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player).
Specific notification means (a function of executing the start CZ effect setting process and the stop CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the result of the advantage determination by the predetermined notification means, and
Equipped with
The advantageous determination means is
A first advantage determination means (a function of executing a start AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the start operation means is operated, and
A second advantage determination means (a function of executing the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing the second advantage determination as the advantage determination after the stop operation means is operated, and
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
A first specific notification (tempai effect based on a specific combination) corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination can be executed as the specific notification at a specific timing before the predetermined stop operation means is operated. 1 Specific notification means (a function of executing the start CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) and
A second specific notification means (stop CZ effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification (tempai effect based on a special combination) corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination at the specific timing as the specific notification. Function to execute setting process) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, the first privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, while the stop operation means is given in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is given when the operation is performed in the above mode, and the mode notification of the operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be performed. It is possible to realize playability such that the benefits obtained with the same result differ depending on the presence or absence.

In this way, while premised on the playability that the benefits obtained by the operation of the stop operation means may differ, the advantage determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player is the start operation means before the operation of the stop operation means. Since it may be performed based on the operation of the above operation or after the operation of the stop operation means, it is not only a game such as whether the first privilege or the second privilege can be obtained depending on the operation mode. It is possible to incorporate the advantage judgment before and after the operation into the game playability, and the game is diversified.

Then, while the first specific notification corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination before the operation of the stop operation means is performed at the specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means, after the operation of the stop operation means is performed. Since the second specific notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination is also performed at a specific timing, the executed specific notification corresponds to either the first advantageous determination or the second advantageous determination. It becomes difficult to distinguish between the two, and even if it is the second specific notification before the execution of the advantage determination, the reliability of the second specific notification can be enhanced by the first specific notification after the execution of the advantage determination. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to specific notification.

Feature B2. A specific number of the stop operation means is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second advantageous determination means executes the second advantageous determination after the specific number of the stop operation means is operated.

According to the above configuration, the second advantage determination is executed after operating all the stop operating means. By doing so, it is clarified that the specific timing, which is the timing before the predetermined stop operation means is operated, is the timing before the operation of all the stop operation means is completed. Therefore, it is also clarified that the second specific notification is the advance notification before the execution of the second advantage determination, and the effect of the feature B1 that enhances the reliability of such advance notification by using the first specific notification is also emphasized. be able to.

Feature B3. The second specific notification means is before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means (stop switch corresponding to the third reel) and after the operation of the specific stop operation means (stop switch corresponding to the first reel). The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, which comprises means for executing the second specific notification at a specific timing (a function of executing a process for performing a tempai effect by the display control device 81). Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the second specific notification is executed at least after the operation of the specific stop operation means is performed, for example, the content of the second advantageous determination may be determined depending on the operation order of the stop operation means. In configurations where the results are different, it is also possible to perform the second specific notification after narrowing down to some extent. Therefore, the reliability of the second specific notification itself can be improved.

Feature B4. The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification when the specific stop operation means is operated in the first aspect (first stop and predetermined location), while the specific stop operation means. When the stop operation means is operated in a second mode (second, third stop, or first stop and other than a predetermined location) different from the first mode, the second specific notification is prevented from being executed. The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of (a function of executing a first stop ON time effect setting process by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the player is given an impression that the second advantageous determination executed after the operation of the stop operation means differs depending on whether the specific stop operation means is operated in the first aspect or the second aspect. It becomes possible to give, and it becomes possible to operate the stop operation means more carefully and with a sense of expectation through the second specific notification.

Feature B5. The second advantageous determination means can execute the second advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the specific stop operation means is operated in the first aspect. The second advantageous determination is described in the feature B4, which is set so that the second advantageous determination may not be executed when the specific stop operation means is operated in the second aspect. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, consistency is ensured that the presence or absence of execution of the second specific notification differs depending on the operation mode as in the feature B4. Therefore, the reliability of the specific notification is enhanced, and it becomes possible to attract attention to the specific notification.

Feature B6. In each game, when the advantage determination is made or when the advantage determination is made, the predetermined notification is started by the predetermined notification means so that the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantage determination is obtained. It is provided with a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a variation display by a numerical character by each variation area SP1 to SP3 by the display control device 81) to end the predetermined notification.
The first specific notification means is executed by the predetermined notification means so as to be the result notification corresponding to the result of the first advantage determination after executing the first specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification. The predetermined notification is executed, and the predetermined notification is executed.
The second specific notification means is executed by the predetermined notification means so as to be the result notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination after executing the second specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the predetermined notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are effects in the middle of the predetermined notification, and after each of these specific notifications is performed, the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is performed. become. By doing so, even if the configuration is such that the second specific notification is performed before the second advantageous determination is performed, the notification content of the second specific notification is supplemented by performing the result notification after that. It is also possible to do so. That is, the second specific notification can be treated as a prior notification, and the degree of freedom of the notification content of the second specific notification is greatly improved.

Feature B7. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the end means for ending the advantageous state (advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main control device 101). Function to execute the processing for termination) and
Specific means (display) for executing the second specific notification by the second specific notification means in a situation where the termination of the advantageous state by the termination means is specified before the termination condition is satisfied. A function to execute a process for performing a push order notification effect for the first small combination to the sixth small combination instead of the specific notification effect during AT when the special combination is won by the control device 81).
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B1 to the feature B6, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B1 to the feature B6.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to signal in advance that the second specific notification corresponding to the second advantageous determination performed after the operation of the stop operation means is performed to reach the upper limit of the advantageous state. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the second specific notification not only a function such as advance notification of the second advantageous determination but also a function such as advance notification of reaching the upper limit of the advantageous state. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific notification through the integration of functions.

Feature B8. The second specific notification means can execute the second specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result.
The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the second specific notification includes notification of contents corresponding to the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific notification is performed in the situation where it is specified that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached, the second operation mode in which the second privilege is granted is shown. By doing so, when the advantageous state ends, the player can acquire more benefits, and it seems that there is an upper limit on the number of benefits that can be acquired in the advantageous state. In the configuration, it is possible to reach the upper limit earlier.

The invention described in the above features B1 to B8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
Specific determination means for executing specific determination to cause a specific event that facilitates execution of aspect notification by the aspect notification means (for example, start AT lottery process, stop AT lottery process, etc. by the main control device 101, etc. Function to execute processing related to the instruction function) and
Equipped with
The specific determination means is
In a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first specific determination is executed as the specific determination, while the stop operation is performed. When the means is operated in the second operation mode, it is set to execute the second specific determination in which the specific event is less likely to occur than the first specific determination or not to execute the specific determination as the specific determination. Has been
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a response result corresponding to causing the specific event, the special game after the game is notified of the specific notification corresponding to the response result. In the specific notification means (process of outputting a precursor command based on the delay flag by the main control device 101 and the process of setting the CZ effect at the start by the display control device 81, doublet effect is performed based on the precursor command. A game machine characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and the mode notification is easily executed. While the first specific determination for causing an event is executed, the second privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the second identification for causing a specific event is performed. A special result is set in which the judgment is executed, and while the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, the first specific judgment is more likely to cause a specific event than the second specific judgment. Therefore, when a special result is obtained, the advantageous side of the privilege given by the privilege giving means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side in causing a specific event (first operation). It is possible to realize a novel playability such as leaving the selection of the mode) to the player.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the result of the specific determination is a response result that causes a specific event, the specific notification that the specific determination result is the response result is not the game, but the special game that has won the special result after that. It is designed so that it may be executed. That is, in the special game in which the special result is won, there may be an inconvenience that the specific notification can be performed only after the stop operation is performed. It will be configured to follow by performing in the game. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of freedom of specific notification in the special game in which the special result is won, while enjoying the benefit of the gameability improvement by providing the special result.

Feature C2. The specific determination means is set so that the third specific determination can be executed as the specific determination regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means in the specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result. Has been
When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the specific notification means sends the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result to the special game after the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C1, which is characterized in that it can be executed in a game.

According to the above configuration, instead of performing the specific notification in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification is performed in the special game in which the first specific determination or the second specific determination is performed depending on the operation mode. Will be performed, and the relationship between the operation mode and the specific notification will be strengthened. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impression that the response result has been won by one's own operation mode, and it is possible to suitably contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

Feature C3. When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the second specific notification means (display) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result in the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing a process of setting the doublet effect in the start CZ effect setting process by the control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the specific notification may be performed in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect an excellent effect such as improving the degree of freedom of the specific notification in the special game while not lowering the attention of the specific game too much.

Feature C4. When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result is the game after the specific game and the special game. Is a third specific notification means that can be executed in different games (a process of outputting a precursor command based on a delay flag by the main control device 101 and the end of the CZ mode, and a process of setting a CZ effect at the start by the display control device 81. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3, which is characterized by having a function function of producing doublet effects based on a command.

According to the above configuration, if the specific notification is not performed in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification can be executed even if the special result is not won. It is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience that the notification is not performed.

Feature C5. In the special game, the specific notification means can execute the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the stop operation means is in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C4, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the specific notification is executed.

Even if it is a special result in which the first specific judgment and the second specific judgment are performed depending on the operation mode, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the previous specific judgment is executed in the special game in which the special result is won. Therefore, the specific notification can be executed regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, by making the specific notification performed regardless of the operation mode as in the above configuration, the result of the first specific determination or the second specific determination (particularly the second specific determination) becomes the corresponding result. It is possible to give the impression that the probability is higher than the actual probability. By doing so, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a specific event even when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature C6. The second pattern combination is characterized in that it can be stopped at the effective position even when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (pushing order bell) different from the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C5.

According to the above configuration, in the special game in which the special result is won, when the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific judgment before that is performed, the special result is won from the stop result in the special game. It is difficult to determine whether it was a special result or a special result. That is, it is possible to give an impression that a specific event occurs not only by a special result but also by using a configuration in which a specific notification is performed in a special game. .. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means can be stopped. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the first picture combination and the third picture combination different from the second picture combination are in the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the combination can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in order to raise the degree of attention in the game in which the special result is won by the specific notification at the time of winning the special result, the second pattern combination may be stopped depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result. Since there are cases where this is not the case, the operation mode when the special result is won is the first operation mode, that the second pattern combination is stopped and the specific notification is performed when the special result is won. It can give the impression that it was executed because of it. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention at the time of winning the special result by making good use of the commonality between the existing special result, which is a so-called push order, and the stop result.

Feature C8. When the specific determination means executes the specific determination based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the special result, the specific determination means executes the specific determination so as to be less likely to be the corresponding result than the first specific determination. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific notification is performed based on the result of the specific processing before that, and when the special result is won, the stop result when the operation is performed in the second operation mode and the special result are used. It is also possible to give the impression that the response result will be obtained by the specific processing based on the special result by utilizing the commonality of the stop roll. In other words, simply giving a specific notification even when the special result is won not only gives the impression that even a special result will be a response result, but may also result in a response result based on the special result. By utilizing the commonality of the stop result with the special result, it is possible to reduce the lie in giving the impression that the response result is obtained even if it is a special result, and it is possible to make it easier to give the impression. It will be possible.

Feature C9. Based on the operation of the start operation means, a predetermined notification (push order prediction effect) is executed, and the stop operation means is operated in the first specific order, so that the result of the specific determination corresponds to the corresponding. The first special notification (correct answer effect) suggesting that the result is executed is executed, and the stop operation means is operated in the second specific order different from the first specific order, so that the result of the specific determination is the above. A special effect executing means (FIG. 70 (c)) for executing a second special notification (incorrect answer effect) suggesting that the result is different from the response result is provided.
The special effect executing means executes the predetermined notification in the special game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C8, which is capable of executing the first special notification.

As in the above configuration, after executing the predetermined notification, the first special notification suggesting that the result of the specific determination is the specific result is executed according to the operation order of the stop operation means, or it is not the specific result. In a configuration in which an effect that predicts the operation order of the stop operation means may be executed, such as executing the suggestion second special notification, the specific notification is sent in the special game in which the special result is won. When executed, even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode on the disadvantageous side such that the second specific determination is executed as the specific determination, the first special notification suggesting that the specific result is obtained is sent. By executing the operation, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a specific event even when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature C10. The second pattern combination is configured to be able to stop at the effective position even when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (pushing order bell) different from the special result.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means can be stopped. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the first picture combination and the third picture combination different from the second picture combination are in the effective position. It is a configuration that allows the combination to be stopped.
The special effect executing means executes the predetermined notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the first special when the stop operation means is operated by the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is capable of executing notification.

According to the above configuration, when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the first special notification suggesting that the result of the specific determination is the specific result is transmitted. May be done. By doing so, the first special notification is executed and the specific notification is executed when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode when the special result is won. C9 In relation to this, it is possible to give the impression that the first special notification has been executed (the specific result has been won) by succeeding in stopping the second pattern combination at the time of winning the special result. As a result of the above, not only the game that won the special result but also the game that won the special result can be improved in attention, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature C11. The special effect executing means executes the predetermined notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the stop operation means is operated by the second operation mode, the second special The gaming machine according to feature C10, which is capable of executing notification.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the second symbol combination is stopped in relation to the execution of the first special notification when the second symbol combination is successfully stopped. Since the second special notification is executed when the failure occurs, the impression that the first special notification is executed in relation to the operation order and the stop result can be further strengthened.

Feature C12. The specific notification means can prevent the specific notification from being executed in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first special notification is executed by the special effect executing means. (FIG. 70 (d)). The gaming machine according to the feature C10 or the feature C11.

According to the above configuration, even if the second pattern combination is successfully stopped when the special result is won and the first special notification is executed, the specific notification that the response result is not executed may not be executed. be. That is, the specific notification is executed in a part of the case where the second pattern combination is stopped and the first special notification is executed. By doing so, the contradiction that the specific notification is not executed (the specific event does not occur) is solved even though the second pattern combination can be stopped when the special result is won. can do.

The invention described in the above features C1 to C12 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C12, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process by the main control device 101) for granting a number of privileges corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
The privilege granting means requires a first period when the first symbol combination is stopped at the effective position and the first privilege is granted, and the second symbol combination is stopped at the effective position. In the case of granting the second privilege, a second period longer than the first period is required.
Advantageous determination means (for example, a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery or an AT addition lottery by the main control device 101) for executing an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, and
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to causing the advantageous event, a process of shifting to the AT mode by the advantageous event means (for example, the main control device 101) for causing the advantageous event or (Function to execute the process of adding) and
After starting the predetermined notification (bomb effect), the advantageous content (explosion effect) corresponding to the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantage result, and the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is the advantage. Specific notification (production of each game in CZ mode) for which any content notification including non-advantageous content (non-explosive effect) corresponding to a result different from the result is performed is executed by a predetermined notification means. Means (a function of executing the start CZ effect setting process and the stop CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) and
Equipped with
The first timing at which the first period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies is stopped is based on the specific notification means rather than the second timing at which the second period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies is stopped. A gaming machine characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification is set so as to be easily executed as the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine game machine to which a number of game values corresponding to the result of the above is given, if the lottery result is a special result, the first privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege which is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege is given. Therefore, when a special result is obtained, the advantageous side of the privilege is given. It may be advantageous for the player to select the operation of (second operation mode).

In addition, an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player is performed, and the result of the advantageous determination is notified as a specific notification. The specific notification is set so that after the predetermined notification is executed, either the advantageous content corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event or the non-advantageous content corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is notified, so that the advantageous event is performed. It is considered that the player who desires the occurrence of the above expects that the specific notification will be advantageous.

Then, after the lap of each orbiting body is stopped and the first period, which is the period in which the first privilege is granted, elapses, the second period, which is the period in which the second privilege is granted, elapses. The specific notification is set so that it is more likely to have an advantageous content than after the above.

By doing so, the special result was won by utilizing the conflicting feelings such as the desire to acquire more advantageous benefits and the desire to confirm the occurrence of advantageous events by making the specific notification advantageous content. It is possible to dramatically improve the playability of the game.

Feature D2. The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second advantage determination, which is less likely to cause the advantage result than the first advantage determination, is executed or the advantage determination is executed as the advantage determination. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is set not to be used.

According to the above configuration, in the special game in which the special combination is won, the content of the advantage determination and the presence / absence of execution differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the first operation mode on the side to which the first privilege is given. However, an advantageous event is more likely to occur than in the second operation mode on which the second privilege is given. As described above, an advantageous event occurs in the first timing when the first period in which the first privilege is granted elapses and in the second timing in which the second period in which the second privilege is granted elapses. With such a configuration, the relationship between the content of the advantage determination in the special game, the presence or absence of execution, and the privilege to be given matches the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a contradiction between the advantage determination and the specific notification to occur, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the specific notification and greatly contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

Feature D3. The privilege granting means is longer than the first period when the player grants the third privilege which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and is more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege. It takes a third period, which is shorter than two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped at the effective position, the third privilege is given by the privilege giving means as a privilege corresponding to the specific result. It is a configuration that
At the third timing in which the third period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies is stopped, it is more difficult for the specific notification means to execute the content notification of the specific notification as the advantageous content than in the first timing, and The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be more easily executed as the advantageous content than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, not only the first and second benefits that can be granted when the special result is won, but also the third benefit that can be granted when the other specific result is won, depending on the length of the period required for granting the benefits. , The easiness of advantageous content will be related. By doing so, it is a novelty that it is easy to break away from the conventional game of trying to acquire more advantageous benefits, and by acquiring less advantageous benefits, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a high level of playability.

Feature D4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the second privilege is given by the privilege giving means.
In the second timing when the second period elapses after each orbiting body is stopped, if the second period is a period triggered by the special result, it is a period triggered by the special result. Feature D1 characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content or not to be the advantageous content than in a certain case. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3.

According to the above configuration, even if the period required for granting the privilege is the same second period, the easiness of the advantageous content will differ depending on the lottery result. In particular, the stop result is common between the case where the second privilege is given in the case of a special result and the case where the second privilege is given in the case of a special result, and it is advantageous from the stop result. It is not possible to grasp the ease of content. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the type of content notification from the length of the lottery result and the period required for granting the privilege.

Feature D5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, a third pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege is given by the privilege giving means. And
In the first timing in which the first period elapses after each orbiting body is stopped, if the first period is a period triggered by the special result, the period triggered by the special result. Feature D1 characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content or not to be the advantageous content than in a certain case. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D4.

According to the above configuration, even if the period required for granting the privilege is the same first period, the easiness of the advantageous content will differ depending on the lottery result. In particular, since the stop result is different depending on whether the first privilege is given in the case of a special result or the first privilege is given in the case of a special result, the stop result and the privilege grant are different. It is possible to realize the playability of predicting the type of content notification from the length of the required period.

Feature D6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a re-gambling result and the pattern combination corresponding to the re-gambling result is stopped at the effective position, the same number as the game that resulted in the re-gambling as the privilege by the privilege-giving means. It is a configuration in which the re-game process in which the number of bets is set is executed.
In the case of the predetermined re-game result (for example, cherries A to C), a fourth period is required when a predetermined number of bets are set in the re-game process, and the specific re-game result (for example, normal) is required. In the case of rips A to C), when the predetermined number of bets is set in the re-game process, the fifth period, which is longer than the fourth period, is set.
The fourth timing at which the fourth period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies is stopped is based on the specific notification means rather than the fifth timing at which the fifth period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the content notification of the specific notification is set so as to be easily executed as the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, the ease with which the specific notification becomes advantageous content also differs depending on the length of the period in which the bet number is set based on the re-game result winning, and the bet number is set in a shorter period. If it is done, it will be more advantageous. By doing so, it is not necessary to make a big difference between the production content when the first privilege or the second privilege is given like other special results and the production content in the case of the replay result, and the comparison is made. With a simple structure, it is possible to realize the novel playability of the feature D1 even in the replay result.

Feature D7. The privilege granting means is longer than the first period when the player grants the third privilege which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and is more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege. It takes a third period, which is shorter than two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped at the effective position, the third privilege is given by the privilege giving means as a privilege corresponding to the specific result. It is a composition that
At the third timing in which the third period elapses after each orbiting body is stopped, it is more difficult for the specific notification means to execute the content notification of the specific notification as the advantageous content than in the first timing, and The content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be more easily executed as the advantageous content than the second timing.
The fourth period is set as a period having the same or substantially the same length as the third period.
After each of the orbiting bodies stopped based on the predetermined replay result, the fourth timing was reached, and after each of the orbiting bodies stopped based on the specific result, the third timing was reached. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized in that the ease of execution of the advantageous content in the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be the same or the same in some cases.

According to the above configuration, not only the first and second benefits that can be granted when the special result is won, but also the third benefit that can be granted when the other specific result is won, depending on the length of the period required for granting the benefits. , It becomes advantageous content and easiness is associated. By doing so, it is a novelty that it is easy to break away from the conventional game of trying to acquire more advantageous benefits, and by acquiring less advantageous benefits, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a high level of playability.

In addition, the fourth period in which a predetermined number of bets are set based on the predetermined re-game result is set to be the same as or substantially the same as the length of the third period, and the case where the predetermined re-game result is specified is also specified. Even if it is a result, it is common that the advantageous contents are likely to be obtained when the third period or the fourth period elapses after the orbiting body is stopped. By doing so, regardless of the type of so-called small role result or replay result, the easiness of gaining advantageous content differs depending on the period after the orbiting body is stopped. Can be realized, and it will be very useful for improving the interest of the game.

Feature D8. The privilege granting means is longer than the first period when the player grants the third privilege which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and is more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege. It takes a third period, which is shorter than two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is stopped at the effective position, the third privilege is given by the privilege giving means as a privilege corresponding to the specific result. It is a composition that
At the third timing in which the third period elapses after each orbiting body is stopped, it is more difficult for the specific notification means to execute the content notification of the specific notification as the advantageous content than in the first timing, and The content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be more easily executed as the advantageous content than the second timing.
The fifth period is set as a longer period than the third period.
After each of the orbiting bodies is stopped based on the specific result of the replay, the third timing is obtained after each of the orbiting bodies is stopped based on the specific result, rather than the case of the fifth timing. The gaming machine according to the feature D6 or the feature D7, wherein the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be more likely to have the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, not only the first and second benefits that can be granted when the special result is won, but also the third benefit that can be granted when the other specific result is won, depending on the length of the period required for granting the benefits. , The easiness of advantageous content will be related. By doing so, it is a novelty that it is easy to break away from the conventional game of trying to acquire more advantageous benefits, and by acquiring less advantageous benefits, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a high level of playability.

On that basis, the fifth period in which a predetermined number of bets are set based on the specific re-game result is set as a period longer than the length of the third period, and when the specific re-game result is obtained, the orbiting body is set. When the fifth period elapses after the stop, it is set so that the content is less likely to be advantageous when the specific result is obtained than when the third period elapses after the orbiter stops. By doing so, regardless of the type of so-called small role result or replay result, the easiness of becoming advantageous content differs depending on the period after the orbiting body is stopped. Can be realized, and it will be very useful for improving the interest of the game.

Feature D9. A specific number of the stop operation means is provided.
The specific notification means is any one of the feature D1 to the feature D8, which is characterized in that the predetermined notification is started when the specific number of the stop operation means is operated among the plurality of the stop operation means. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the period from the start of the predetermined notification to the advantageous content of the content notification in the specific notification is associated with the period from the stop of the whole circumference to the completion of the privilege grant. Become. By doing so, it becomes possible to incorporate it into the game even during the period after the orbiting body is stopped, and it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game by using such a configuration.

Feature D10. After executing the content notification of the non-advantageous content, the specific notification means executes result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means, while executing the content notification of the advantageous content. The game according to any one of the features D1 to D9, wherein the corresponding notification (AT winning notification) corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event can be executed before or after the result notification. Machine.

As in the above configuration, when the content notification of the advantageous content is performed, the correspondence notification and the result notification are performed as a set, and when the content notification of the non-advantageous content is performed, only the result notification is performed. As in D1, if the shorter the period after the orbiting body is stopped, the more advantageous the content is, it is possible to secure the period for the response notification well, and the length of the period for directing can be increased. It is not necessary to make the difference according to the result of the advantage determination, and it is possible to expect the excellent effect of the feature D1 while optimizing the progress of the game.

The invention described in the above features D1 to D10 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to the feature B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
Advantageous determination means (for example, main control) that executes an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number). It is equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function, such as the AT lottery processing at the start and the AT lottery processing at the stop by the device 101).
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second advantage determination that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination is executed or the advantage determination is made as the advantage determination. It is set not to run,
When the specific numerical information is used for the advantage determination, the result of the advantage determination can be specified before the advantage determination is made, and the prior identification means (pre-determination process by the main control device 101, etc.) is executed. Function)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the destination specifying means can specify the result of the first advantage determination when the specific numerical information is used for the first advantage determination. With specific means
In the special game, the specific notification means (display control device) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific result by the first first specific means at the specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a function of performing a first stop ON time effect setting process according to 81 and a process for performing a specific notification effect).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and an advantageous event advantageous to the player. The first advantage determination is executed as an advantage determination that causes The special result is set, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, while the first advantage judgment is more advantageous than the second advantage judgment, so that the special result is obtained. In that case, a novel playability such as entrusting the player with the selection between the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) for the advantageous determination is provided. It is possible to achieve it.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the game in which the privilege given by such an operation mode and the special result in which the advantage determination is different are won, the operation is performed in at least the first operation mode before the advantage determination is made. When the result of the first advantageous determination is specified when the first advantageous determination is executed, and the specific notification corresponding to the specific result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous determination. There is.

By doing so, the result of the first advantage determination on the advantageous side for the player can be specified first, and the effect according to the result on the advantageous side can be performed in advance. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect that greatly incites the result of the advantageous determination in advance. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production design is greatly improved, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. After the branch timing (first stop ON operation) in which the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed, the specific notification means has either the first operation mode or the second operation mode. The game according to feature E1, characterized in that the specific notification is performed with the timing of the above as the specific timing (a function of executing a process for performing a tempai effect by the display control device 81). Machine.

According to the above configuration, the player cannot determine which operation mode to operate by the specific notification. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be completely detected before the operation, if the detected content is not preferable for the player, the second advantage determination is made, but the second privilege is acquired. Although it is conceivable to operate in the second operation mode, if the specific notification is generated after the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode as described above, any of the specific notifications will be generated based on the specific notification. It is possible to start the effect corresponding to the result of the advantage determination before the advantage determination, while making it impossible to determine whether to use the operation mode.

Feature E3. The first operation mode is to operate the specific stop operation means (left stop switch 42) to the specific th (first) among the plurality of the stop operation means, which is different from the specific stop operation means. The second operation mode is to operate the predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) in the specific order, and the branch timing is the timing at which the specific stop operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to feature E2, which is characterized by being.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature E2, and by performing the above, it is possible to determine which advantage determination is executed only by grasping which stop operation means is to be operated in the specific order. It is possible to determine the advantage at the time of winning the special result with a relatively simple configuration, and it is possible to specify by the prior identification means at the time of winning the special result.

Feature E4. The specific stop operation means is operated at the specific order, and the specific stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific pattern in the specific orbiting body corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in the specific range. Is the first operation mode, and the predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated in the specific order, and the specific stop operation means is operated. The second operation mode is set to operate the specific stop operation means at the timing when the specific pattern does not exist in the specific range and the operation is performed in the specific order. The gaming machine according to the feature E3.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode and the second operation mode are the first operation modes including not only the operation of the specific stop operation means in the specific order but also the operation timing of the specific stop operation means. It depends on whether it is the second operation mode. By doing so, the difficulty level of performing the first operation mode is improved, the playability is improved including the operation for making the first advantage determination, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are improved. In the case of operation regardless of the above, the probability of becoming the second operation mode is high, which makes it easy to obtain the second privilege on the advantageous side. Therefore, the gameplay that gives priority to making an advantage determination and the gameplay that does not give priority to making an advantage determination become significantly different, and the enjoyment of determining which one to select can be improved. ..

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the specific notification means can execute the specific notification based on an operation of the stop operation means after the specific order.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on the operation after the specific th operation which is the branch timing of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to secure a time grace for performing the specific notification without making a cramped processing configuration such as specifying by the prior identification means at the branch timing and executing the specific notification. It will be possible. Further, since the specific th operation is the branch timing of the operation mode, it is considered that the player is trying to perform a more careful operation, but if the specific notification is performed at such a timing, There is a possibility that the special notification will be overlooked. In that respect, by generating the specific notification after the branch timing as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the specific notification.

Feature E6. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, the second specific notification means (when the special combination is not won by the display control device 81) so that the specific notification is performed at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E5, which is provided with a function of executing a process for performing a tempai effect or a specific notification effect).

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is generated even if the specific notification is another specific result, the specific notification is less likely to be a marker of the special result. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the game result from the content of the notification, and it is possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature E7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the advantage determination means is configured to be able to execute the third advantage determination as the advantage determination before the stop operation means is operated.
The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the second specific notification means executes the specific notification based on the result of the third advantage determination.

According to the above configuration, unlike the special result in which the content of the advantage determination and the presence / absence of execution differ depending on the operation mode, if it is a specific result, the third advantage determination is executed before the operation of the stop operation means. Since the specific notification based on the specific result is the notification based on the result of the third advantageous determination, it is not a prior notification even at a specific timing, and it is not necessary to go through a special process such as a prior identification means. That is, on the premise of such a configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification in the special game in which the special result is won is matched with the execution timing of the specific notification when the specific result is won, and only the special game is played. However, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity such as a different mode of notification.

Feature E8. The advantageous determination means is characterized in that the same specific numerical information is used in the case of executing the first advantageous determination, the case of executing the second advantageous determination, and the case of executing the third advantageous determination. Features The gaming machine described in E7.

According to the above configuration, since the configuration uses common specific numerical information regardless of which advantageous judgment is performed, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with preparing specific numerical information according to each advantageous judgment. It is planned. Moreover, even if it is not possible to ascertain which lottery result is obtained at the time of acquisition, or even if it is not possible to ascertain which operation mode will be used, the acquisition process is not different and the common acquisition process is used. It is possible to make an advantageous judgment, and the processing configuration can be overwhelmingly simplified.

Feature E9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the destination specifying means can specify the result of the second advantage determination when the specific numerical information is used for the second advantage determination. The gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E8, which comprises a specific means.

According to the above configuration, not only the first advantageous determination on the advantageous side but also the second advantageous determination side is specified in advance, so that an advantageous event occurs by operating in the second operation mode. It is also possible to perform specific notifications or other notifications by covering such situations, and to diversify the playability based on the notifications and the notifications in the special games that won the special result. Is possible.

Feature E10. When the specific result by the prior identification means is a result that the result of the first advantageous determination does not correspond to causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the first advantageous determination is performed. A means (display control) for executing the specific notification by the specific notification means in a notification mode that can be executed even when the result of the first advantageous determination is a result corresponding to causing the advantageous event in the case of a failure. The feature E1 to the feature E9 is characterized in that the device 81 is provided with a function of executing a process of generating a tempai effect even when the first operation winning notice command or the like is not received. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is not determined from the specific notification that an advantageous event does not occur even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, that is, the operation should be performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. Become. By doing so, the specific notification is less likely to be an index that facilitates the acquisition of the second privilege, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature E11. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
Advantageous determination means (for example, main control) that executes an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number). It is equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function, such as the AT lottery processing at the start and the AT lottery processing at the stop by the device 101).
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second advantage determination that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination is executed or the advantage determination is made as the advantage determination. It is set not to run,
When the specific numerical information is used for the advantage determination, the result of the advantage determination can be specified before the advantage determination is made. Function)
In the special game, the specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific result by the prior specific means at the specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function for setting an effect when the first stop is turned on and a process for performing a specific notification effect).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and an advantageous event advantageous to the player. The first advantage determination is executed as an advantage determination that causes The special result is set, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, while the first advantage judgment is more advantageous than the second advantage judgment, so that the special result is obtained. In that case, a novel playability such as entrusting the player with the selection between the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) for the advantageous determination is provided. It is possible to achieve it.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the game in which the privilege given by such an operation mode and the special result in which the advantage determination is different are won, the advantage determination is executed before the advantage determination is made. The result of the advantage determination is specified, and the specific notification corresponding to the specific result may be executed before the execution timing of the advantage determination.

By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect according to the result of the advantage determination in advance, so that it is possible to set an effect that greatly incites the result of the advantage determination in advance. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production design is greatly improved, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E10 to the above-mentioned feature E11, and a part or all of the respective technical ideas. It is also possible to apply in combination.

The invention described in the above features E1 to E11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
Advantageous determination means (for example, main control) that executes an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number). It is equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function, such as the AT lottery processing at the start and the AT lottery processing at the stop by the device 101).
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second advantage determination that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination is executed or the advantage determination is made as the advantage determination. It is set not to run,
When the specific numerical information is used for the advantage determination, the result of the advantage determination can be specified before the advantage determination is made. Function) and
In the special game, the specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific result by the prior specific means at the specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed. (A function to execute the first stop ON time effect setting process and the process for performing the specific notification effect)
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a result that the result of the first advantageous determination does not correspond to causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the first advantageous determination is performed. A limiting means (display) for executing the specific notification by the specific notification means in a notification mode that can be executed even when the result of the first advantageous determination is a result corresponding to causing the advantageous event in the case of a failure. (A function to execute a process to generate a tempai effect even when the first operation winning notice command or the like by the control device 81 is not received) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and an advantageous event advantageous to the player. The first advantage determination is executed as an advantage determination that causes The special result is set, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, while the first advantage judgment is more advantageous than the second advantage judgment, so that the special result is obtained. In that case, a novel playability such as entrusting the player with the selection between the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) for the advantageous determination is provided. It is possible to achieve it.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the game in which the privilege given by such an operation mode and the special result in which the advantage determination is different are won, the advantage determination is executed before the advantage determination is made. The result of the advantage determination is specified, and the specific notification corresponding to the specific result may be executed before the execution timing of the advantage determination.

By doing so, it becomes possible to perform an effect according to the result of the advantage determination in advance, and it is possible to set an effect that greatly incites the result of the advantage determination in advance.

However, if it is possible to determine in which operation mode the operation should be performed through the fact that the result of the advantage determination can be detected in advance, it becomes difficult to guarantee the fairness of the game. That is, if the result of the first advantageous determination on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, it is better to use the second operation mode. The act of operating and acquiring the second privilege may also be performed. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if the first advantageous determination is made when the specific notification is made, a limiting means is provided so as not to determine that the result does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the above actions to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably expect the effect of the specific notification while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In the above configuration, "when the specific result by the prior identification means does not correspond to the result of the first advantageous determination causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the above. When the first advantageous determination is made, the specific notification by the specific notification means is performed in a notification mode that can be executed even when the result of the first advantageous determination is a result corresponding to causing the advantageous event. "The specific notification means is provided with means to be executed" means that "the specific notification means executes the specific notification so that it is not determined that the result of the first advantageous determination is a result corresponding to the fact that the advantageous event does not occur". It may be expressed as "when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous determination is executed, the result of the first advantageous determination causes the advantageous event." In the case where the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous determination is executed, the result of the first advantageous determination is the above. The notification mode of the specific notification is set so that the result may correspond to not causing an advantageous event. "

Feature F2. When the specific result by the prior identification means corresponds to the result of the first advantageous determination causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the first advantageous determination is performed. If the result of the first advantageous determination is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the specific notification by the specific notification means is executed in a notification mode (determined effect) that is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification in the notification mode in which it is determined that the advantageous event will occur if the operation is performed in the first operation mode is permitted, it is confirmed that the advantageous event does not occur. It is possible not only to solve the problem that the reliability of the specific notification itself is lowered by limiting the notification mode, but also to improve the reliability, so that the degree of attention to the specific notification can be increased. It can be suitably increased.

Feature F3. The specific notification means executes the execution of the special notification (tempai effect) by the predetermined notification means as the specific notification.
Even if the specific result by the prior identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the special notification is given. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2, which is set so that may be executed.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F1, and if the configuration is such that the special notification can be executed regardless of the specific result by the prior identification means as in the above configuration, the specific notification may be whether or not the special notification is executed. With a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect of feature F1.

Features F4. It is provided with an execution lottery means (a function of executing a tempai effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for performing an execution lottery for executing the special notification in the special game.
When the specific result by the prior identification means corresponds to the result of the first advantageous determination causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the execution by the execution lottery means. The probability of the execution result corresponding to the execution of the special notification in the lottery is higher than the case where the result of the first advantageous determination is the result not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, or the execution lottery. The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is set to execute the special notification without going through.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the specific result by the prior identification means only by adjusting the winning probability of the execution lottery of the special notification or making the presence or absence of the execution lottery different, and the result of the advantageous determination can be notified in advance. It is possible to achieve the effect of feature F1 with an extremely simple configuration while notifying.

Feature F5. When the result of the advantageous determination is the corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event and the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is performed, the result of the advantageous determination causes the advantageous event. After executing the non-corresponding result as the result notification, the predetermined notification is executed, and the correspondence result is executed as the result notification. Function) and
When the result of the advantage determination is the non-correspondence result and the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantage determination is performed, the non-correspondence result is executed as the result notification, then the predetermined notification is executed, and the non-correspondence determination is performed. A second result notification means (a function of executing a bomb effect when the AT is not won by the display control device 81) that executes the corresponding result as the result notification, and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is the result that the result of the advantage determination is the corresponding result and the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means, the result notification by the first result notification means is performed. Features F1 to feature F1 to have a means (a function of executing a process of generating a bomb effect when a first operation winning notice command or the like by the display control device 81 is received). Feature The gaming machine according to any one of F4.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination is the response result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the non-correspondence result not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is notified as the result notification. After that, a so-called revival effect is provided, in which the response result is notified as a result notification via the predetermined notification, or the response result is terminated with the non-correspondence result via the predetermined notification. After the non-correspondence result, the correspondence result is made to be obtained through the predetermined notification. That is, even if the specific notification is performed and the non-correspondence result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event is once notified as the result notification, there is a possibility that the response result will be revived and notified as the result notification. Therefore, even if it can be predicted that the result of the advantageous judgment will be a non-correspondence result from the mode of the specific notification and the presence or absence of its execution, if it is used as the second operation mode by itself, the possibility of the above revival will be raised by itself. It will be lost by the operation of. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from becoming a mark for efficiently acquiring the second privilege, while expecting the effect of the specific notification.

Feature F6. When the specific result by the prior identification means is the result that the result of the advantage determination is the non-correspondence result and the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means, the result by the second result notification means. The feature F5 is characterized by having a means for making a notification (a function of executing a process of generating a bomb effect even if the first operation winning notice command or the like by the display control device 81 is not received). The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantage determination is specified in advance and the result is that the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result that does not correspond to causing an advantageous event, the non-correspondence result is once. After that, the result notification is performed so that the non-corresponding result is further obtained via the predetermined notification. In this way, even if the result of the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result, the so-called revival effect is performed, so that it is difficult to distinguish from the revival effect when the result of the advantage determination is the correspondence result. This makes it possible to prevent the specific notification from becoming a mark for efficiently acquiring the second privilege.

Feature F7. It has a specific number of the stop operation means, which is a plurality.
The gaming machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, wherein the first result notification means and the second result notification means execute the predetermined notification when the specific number of the stop operation means is operated. ..

According to the above configuration, a predetermined notification is generated by operating all the stop operation means. That is, after the result notification is performed by the first result notification means or the second result notification means, the predetermined notification is switched to the correct result notification (as it is) via the predetermined notification, and the predetermined notification is all the stop operation means. Is operated, the correct result notification is made after the operation of the stop operation means is completed. By doing so, in a configuration in which the content of the advantageous judgment and the presence / absence of execution differ depending on the operation mode, the operation of the stop operation means and the development of the notification can be enjoyed until the end while the result is notified as a specific notification in advance. It is possible to do so.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the specific notification is executed before the specific number of the stop operation means is operated.

By making the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific notification is executed before the advantageous determination, and it is possible to suitably expect the effect of the specific notification.

The invention described in the above features F1 to F8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to the feature B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
Advantageous determination means (for example, main control) that executes an advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number). It is equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function, such as the AT lottery processing at the start and the AT lottery processing at the stop by the device 101).
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second advantage determination that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage determination is executed or the advantage determination is made as the advantage determination. It is set not to run,
When the specific numerical information is used for the advantage determination, the result of the advantage determination can be specified before the advantage determination is made. Function) and
When the specific result by the prior identification means is a non-corresponding result in which the result of the first advantageous determination does not correspond to causing the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the predetermined in the special game. At a specific timing before the operation of the stop operation means is executed, a process for performing a specific notification effect by the specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the non-correspondence result is performed. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and an advantageous event advantageous to the player. The first advantage determination is executed as an advantage determination that causes The special result is set, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, while the first advantage judgment is more advantageous than the second advantage judgment, so that the special result is obtained. In that case, a novel playability such as entrusting the player with the selection between the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) for the advantageous determination is provided. It is possible to achieve it.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is assumed that the first advantage determination is executed before the advantage determination is made in the game in which the special result with different benefits and advantage determinations given by such an operation mode is won. Then, when the result of the first advantageous determination is specified and the specific result is a non-corresponding result corresponding to causing an advantageous event, the specific notification corresponding to the non-corresponding result is the advantageous determination. It may be executed before the execution timing of. By doing so, at the time of winning the special result, even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the result of the first advantage determination on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event. , It is possible to realize the playability such as operating in the second operation mode to acquire the second privilege. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the specific notification means can be made to perform the specific notification when the start operation means is operated at the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed when the start operation means is operated before the stop operation means is operated. By doing so, it is meaningless that the specific notification is executed after the operation has already been performed in the first operation mode in order to perform the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode by the specific notification. It is possible to prevent the production from being unpleasant.

Feature G3. It is provided with an execution determination means (a function of executing a navigation mode lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining the execution of the specific notification.
Described in feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the specific notification means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is an execution result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won and the result of the first advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, the specific notification is not executed unless the execution determination is won. In this way, in addition to the game in which the first advantageous judgment is won and an advantageous event is generated, the game in which the first advantageous judgment is not won and the advantageous event is not generated but the second privilege is obtained in the second operation mode is added. Then, in the game that obtains the second privilege, it becomes necessary to win the execution judgment. Therefore, we aim to win the first advantage judgment, and if the first advantage judgment is not won, we want you to win the execution judgment at least. It is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features G4. A plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege granting means are set, and a setting value of one of the plurality of setting values is set. Equipped with means (a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the main control device 101)
The result of the first advantage determination is the result of the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value which is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set. While the probability of a response result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event is common, the case where the first set value is set by the setting means and the case where the second set value is set are the same. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means becomes the execution result is different.

According to the above configuration, even if the winning probability of the first advantageous judgment is not different depending on the set value, the winning probability of the execution judgment is made different depending on the set value, so that the acquisition rate of the second privilege at the time of winning the special result is set. It is possible to make them different depending on the value. By doing so, in designing the ball output rate, etc., it is possible to make the number of games that can be played with a unit game value (so-called base) different depending on the set value, without making the occurrence rate of advantageous events different. Become.

Feature G5. As a gaming state, a specific state (navigation mode) in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means and a non-specific state in which the specific notification is less likely to be executed by the specific notification means or the specific notification is not executed than the specific state. The state (normal mode) and is set,
When the transition condition (navigation mode winning) is satisfied, the means for transitioning from the non-specific state to the specific state (a function of executing the process of setting the navigation mode flag by the display control device 81) and
When the end condition (AT mode transition) is satisfied, the means for transitioning from the specific state to the non-specific state (a function of executing the process of clearing the navigation mode flag by the display control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is likely to occur by shifting to the specific state, it is possible to receive an advantageous judgment that efficiently causes an advantageous event while acquiring the second privilege at the time of winning the special role. Become. By setting such a specific state, it becomes possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest of the game.

The "specific state" may be expressed as "first state" and the "non-specific state" may be expressed as "second state".

Feature G6. The privilege granting means grants the game value provided for the game as the privilege.
The first privilege is the first number of game values,
The second privilege is the game value of the second number, which is larger than the first number.
The average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average increase number of game values that increase per unit game is higher than that of the first game mode in which the special game is operated in the first operation mode in the non-specific state. If the specific notification is performed in the special game in the specific state, the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and if the specific notification is not performed in the special game, the first operation mode is used. There are more second game modes to be operated in
Further, the average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average increase number of game values that increase per unit game is the first when the specific notification is performed in the special game in the specific state. When the specific notification is not performed in the special game when the operation is performed in the two operation modes, the special game is performed in the non-specific state rather than the second game mode in which the specific notification is performed in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the number of the third gaming mode operated in the second operating mode is larger.

The above configuration specifically expresses the benefits of the specific notification in relation to the benefits given by the privilege granting means, and as in the above configuration, the response result in which an advantageous event occurs due to the specific notification. The second game mode, in which the second number of game values are acquired without receiving the advantage judgment in the case of a non-correspondence result, is always operated by the first operation mode. The average number of games per unit game value and the average increase in the game value per unit game are larger than those of the first game mode, and the unit game value is always higher than that of the third game mode in which the operation is always performed in the second operation mode. The average number of games and the average increase in the game value per unit game will be reduced. Therefore, in letting the player select which game to play, the choices are increased, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature G7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is more likely to be the corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantage event than the other results. Is set,
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification means (specific notification effect based on the special combination by the display control device 81) that executes the special notification having the same notification mode as the specific notification by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that it is provided with a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification and the special notification have the same notification mode, it is easy to win the advantageous judgment whether the notification is performed in the second operation mode when the special result is won. It is not possible to determine whether the notification that the special result has been won is being notified. In other words, it is possible to notify that the second privilege can be obtained even if the special result is not won, while expecting that an advantageous event will occur based on the special result winning. Since the first advantage determination is not won, even when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the occurrence of an advantageous event.

The "other result" may be a "special result" or a different result. Further, the "special result" does not have to be the result in which the result of the advantageous judgment is most likely to be the correspondence result, and the result may be more likely to be the correspondence result than the "special result", and at least the "special result". Any configuration may be used as long as the result of the advantage determination triggered by the above may be the response result.

Features G8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the special result is given by the privilege giving means. It is a composition,
The notification mode is set so that the special notification should be operated in the third operation mode capable of stopping the special pattern combination at the effective position.
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the third operation mode is included in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the notification to the effect that the special result winning should be established is performed as a special notification, and the third operation mode in which the special result winning can be established is included in the second operation mode. Then, when a specific notification having the same notification mode is performed, it is possible to perform the second operation mode while aiming for a special result prize, and the player obtains the second privilege without being particularly conscious of it. You will be able to.

Feature G9. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
When a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, the end means for ending the advantageous state (advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main control device 101). It has a function to execute the processing for termination)
In a situation where the termination of the advantageous state by the termination means is specified before the termination condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the specific notification by the specific notification means is permitted to be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G8.

According to the above configuration, by performing the specific notification, it is possible to establish the end condition earlier, or to increase the total acquisition privilege acquired when the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

The invention described in the above features G1 to G9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to the feature B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation can be established. When the means are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, the second result (9th small winning combination to 32nd) in which the privilege given by the privilege giving means is smaller than that in the first result. The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the advantageous determination means for executing the advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event for the player (for example, the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function such as AT addition lottery processing)
The advantageous determination means sets the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of starting by the main control device 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state. Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT lottery processing when stopped)
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result. By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win a prize for the second result or a result corresponding to the second result, which is different from the first order result among the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result, while the stop operation means is described. By operating in the first operation order, it is set so that the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be won.
It is provided with an order notification means (a function of executing push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification regarding the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the normal state, the order notification means makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. While controlling the predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, if the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed. However, if it is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the third result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. While the first advantage determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the third result. It is possible to win a prize of the fourth result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the advantageous event is caused more than the first advantageous determination as the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means. A special result is set in which the second advantage determination, which is unlikely to result in the corresponding advantageous result, is executed or the advantage determination is not executed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established and the said. When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the order notification means is predetermined among the order notification of the first operation order and the plurality of operation sequences including the second operation order. The specific order notification means (in the special combination winning game by the main control device 101) capable of executing the specific order notification (push order notification for the sixth small combination) corresponding to the operation order of the other one by the predetermined notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to execute push order notification for 6 small roles.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of the second result prize, which has less benefits than when the first result is won, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order notification of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to realize excellent playability such that the advantages can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the order notification.

As the order result, the first order result and the second order result are set, and the operation order for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even if the order result is obtained, the order notification is set in such a manner that the first order result and the second order result cannot be discriminated before the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the operation order for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the advantage is enjoyed even before the transition in order to greatly change the advantage by the order notification when the transition to the advantageous state occurs.

Then, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the judgment result of the advantage determination causes an advantageous event. While the first advantage determination, which tends to give an advantageous result, is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. As an advantageous judgment, a special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to be an advantageous result is executed, and the player selects an advantageous degree of the advantageous judgment or selects the one with more benefits, which is extremely special. Playability can be added.

In this case, at the time of winning the special result, even if the operation is performed in the first operation order in which the first result is won in the case of the first order result, the first result is won in the case of the second order result. Even when the operations are performed in the second operation order, the fourth result winning is set as the second operation mode.

Here, before the transition to the advantageous state, it is considered that it is advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to cause an advantageous event as much as possible at the time of winning the special result, but in the advantageous state, as much as possible. It is considered that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode in order to obtain many benefits.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a special result is won during an advantageous state, the order notification such as the first operation order or the second operation order is performed to promote the establishment of the fourth result winning. Therefore, in order to realize the playability of acquiring more benefits when the special result is won, it is not necessary to provide the notification for the second operation mode dedicated to the special result, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

Not only that, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the specific order notification corresponding to one predetermined operation order among the first operation order and the second operation order is used as the order notification. It is configured to notify. By doing so, although the fourth result winning is established in any operation order, it is not necessary to decide which operation order is to be notified at the time of winning the special combination, and the processing configuration is extremely simple. can do. Therefore, with an extremely simple configuration, it is possible to establish a fourth result prize when a special result is won during an advantageous state.

In addition, "in the order notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to identify which of the first order result and the second order result. While controlling the predetermined notification means so as to be, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, if it is the first order result, the order corresponding to the first operation order. The notification is executed, and if it is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed. ”The configuration of“ the order notification means is the lottery in the normal state. When the lottery result by the means is the order result, a special notification is executed so that the player cannot easily identify which of the first order result and the second order result is, while in the advantageous state. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed if it is the first order result, and the second operation order is performed if it is the second order result. It is intended to execute the corresponding order notification, and may be expressed as ", and such a change in expression can be applied to features and feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific order notification is set as an order notification corresponding to an operation order that does not correspond to the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid the event that the third result winning is established even though the specific order notification at the time of winning the special result is obeyed.

Feature H3. The specific stop operation means specified in advance is operated in the specific order, and the specific stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific pattern in the specific orbiter corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in the specific range. That is the first operation mode, and the predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated in the specific order, and the specific stop operation is performed. The second operation mode is set to operate the means in the specific order and operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific pattern in the specific orbiter does not exist in the specific range. Has been
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the specific order notification is set to be an order notification of an operation order for operating the predetermined stop operation means at the specific order.

According to the above configuration, when the first operation mode is defined by the operation order and the operation timing, even if the operation order is the first operation mode, the second operation mode can be obtained as long as the operation timing is different. It is also possible to do. That is, although it is possible to establish a configuration in which the third result winning or the fourth result winning is established depending on the operation timing when the specific order notification is performed, such a configuration is not intentionally performed in the above configuration. , If the stop operation means is operated according to the operation order of the specific order notification, the 4th result prize will always be established regardless of the operation timing, and more benefits will be obtained when the special result is won in the advantageous state. It is possible to make a configuration that matches the intention.

Features H4. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given to the effective position. When the pattern combination of 4 is stopped, the privilege corresponding to the 4th result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H3, wherein the first pattern combination is the same as or corresponding to the fourth pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop result is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed even at the time of winning the order result, the first result winning or the fourth result winning is based on the order result winning. Whether it is a thing or a cause of winning a special result cannot be determined from the outcome or order notification. By doing so, for example, it is difficult to make predictions in a configuration that can predict useful information for the player, such as predicting a set value from the winning probability of a special result or the winning probability of an order result. Is possible.

The "corresponding pattern combination" means a relationship in which a specific pattern combination stops at a position different from the effective position, although the pattern combinations that stop at the effective position are different from each other. In this case, the position where the specific pattern combination stops may be different in both results. This point can be applied to other features and other feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature H5. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result is stopped at the effective position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the fourth result corresponds to the effective position. When the fourth pattern combination is stopped, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of feature H1 to feature H4, wherein the first privilege is the same privilege as the fourth privilege.

According to the above configuration, the privilege to be given is common to the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed even at the time of winning the order result, the first result winning or the fourth result winning is based on the order result winning. Whether it is a thing or a cause of winning a special result cannot be determined from the benefits and order notification given. By doing so, for example, it is difficult to make predictions in a configuration that can predict useful information for the player, such as predicting a set value from the winning probability of a special result or the winning probability of an order result. Is possible.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H4 or feature H5, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature H4 and the feature H5, and by achieving the same result in this way, excellent effects of the feature H4 and the feature H5 can be expected with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature H7. Order notification corresponding to a plurality of operation sequences including the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence, at least based on a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result. It is equipped with a selection means (a function of executing a notification small winning combination lottery process by the main control device 101) for selecting an order notification corresponding to one of the operation orders.
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the specific order notification means executes the order notification selected by the selection means as the specific order notification by the predetermined notification means. ..

As in the above configuration, if the specific order notification as one predetermined order notification is determined based on a predetermined opportunity, the processing load at the time of winning the special result is reduced, but the notification is notified at the time of winning the special result. It is possible to guarantee the randomness of order notification.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to feature H7, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs when the machine shifts to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since a predetermined opportunity occurs at the time of transition to an advantageous state, a special result is won, and there is no inconvenience that the selection is not completed even though the order notification should be executed, and the factory shipment. The frequency of selection can be higher than that of a configuration in which time is a predetermined trigger. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the order notification.

The invention described in the above features H1 to H8 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic I group>
Features I1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation can be established. When the means are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, the second result (9th small winning combination to 32nd) in which the privilege given by the privilege giving means is smaller than that in the first result. The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the advantageous determination means for executing the advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event for the player (for example, the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function such as AT addition lottery processing)
The advantageous determination means sets the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of starting by the main control device 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state. Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT lottery processing when stopped)
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result. By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win a prize for the second result or a result corresponding to the second result, which is different from the first order result among the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result, while the stop operation means is described. By operating in the first operation order, it is set so that the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be won.
It is provided with an order notification means (a function of executing push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification regarding the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
In the order notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. While controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, if it is the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed. If it is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the third result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. While the first advantage determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the third result. It is possible to win a prize of the fourth result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means causes the advantageous event rather than the first advantageous determination. A special result is set in which the second advantage determination, which is unlikely to result in the corresponding advantageous result, is executed or the advantage determination is not executed.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established and the said. When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the order notification means is one operation from the order notification corresponding to a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order. A gaming machine comprising a selection means (a function of executing a notification small winning combination lottery process by the main control device 101) for selecting an order notification corresponding to an order, and executing the order notification selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of the second result prize, which has less benefits than when the first result is won, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order notification of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to realize excellent playability such that the advantages can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the order notification.

As the order result, the first order result and the second order result are set, and the operation order for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even if the order result is obtained, the order notification is set in such a manner that the first order result and the second order result cannot be discriminated before the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the operation order for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the advantage is enjoyed even before the transition in order to greatly change the advantage by the order notification when the transition to the advantageous state occurs.

Then, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the judgment result of the advantage determination causes an advantageous event. While the first advantage determination, which tends to give an advantageous result, is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. As an advantageous judgment, a special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to be an advantageous result is executed, and the player selects an advantageous degree of the advantageous judgment or selects the one with more benefits, which is extremely special. Playability can be added.

In this case, at the time of winning the special result, even if the operation is performed in the first operation order in which the first result is won in the case of the first order result, the first result is won in the case of the second order result. Even when the operations are performed in the second operation order, the fourth result winning is set as the second operation mode.

Here, before the transition to the advantageous state, it is considered that it is advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to cause an advantageous event as much as possible at the time of winning the special result, but in the advantageous state, as much as possible. It is considered that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode in order to obtain many benefits.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a special result is won during an advantageous state, the order notification such as the first operation order or the second operation order is performed to promote the establishment of the fourth result winning. Therefore, in order to realize the playability of acquiring more benefits when the special result is won, it is not necessary to provide the notification for the second operation mode dedicated to the special result, and it is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

Not only that, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the order notification corresponding to one operation order from the first operation order and the second operation order is selected, and the selected order notification is selected. Therefore, it is possible to equalize the execution ratio of the order notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the special result winning being detected from the order notification.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the selection means selects the order notification including the order notification corresponding to the operation order according to the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, in addition to the 4th small winning combination winning, the 3rd small winning combination may also be established by the order notification at the time of winning the special result. By doing so, it is possible to include in the playability that the third small winning combination is established or the fourth small winning combination is established, and it is possible to more preferably equalize the order notification. Will be.

Feature I3. A plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege granting means are set, and a setting value of one of the plurality of setting values is set. Equipped with means (a function to execute a winning probability setting process by the main control device 101)
The selection means is the first operation mode depending on whether the first setting value is set by the setting means or the second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the ratio of selecting the order notification corresponding to the operation order is different.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the third result may be won instead of the fourth result even though the operation is performed according to the order notification, if the third result is won, the privilege is small, but the setting is made. This is a case where it can be used as a material for predicting a value, and rather it can be a favorable event for a player. By doing so, when the order notification that is the first operation mode is selected while the order notification that is the first operation mode is also selected to equalize the occurrence rate of each order notification. It is possible to follow the points where the player can suffer disadvantages.

Feature I4. The selection means is the first operation mode depending on whether the first setting value is set by the setting means or the second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means. The difference in the ratio of selecting the order notification corresponding to the operation order is the ratio of selecting the predetermined order notification by the selection means and the other order notification when the first set value is set. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the selection means is larger than the difference from the selection ratio.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the selection rate of each order notification is larger than the setting difference of the selection rate of the order notification, which is the first operation mode, while trying to equalize the occurrence rate of each order notification. It becomes easy to perform a game of predicting a set value from the order notification which is the first operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to successfully follow the disappointment that the third small winning combination is established and the privilege is small by performing the order notification which is the first operation mode.

Feature I5. The operation sequence has a specific number of types, which is a plurality.
The game according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the selection means selects at least the operation sequences so that the selection rates of the other operation sequences other than the predetermined operation sequence are equal. Machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the operation order is not divisible by 100%, the selection rate is equalized at least for the operation order other than the predetermined operation order. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute the order notification more evenly.

Feature I6. A plurality of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege granting means are set, and a setting value of one of the plurality of setting values is set. Equipped with means (a function to execute a winning probability setting process by the main control device 101)
It is set as the predetermined order notification depending on whether the first set value is set by the setting means or the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I5, characterized in that the order notification is different.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict the set value by using the remainder of the selectivity that is not divisible by 100%. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as predicting the set value by making good use of the part where the order notification cannot be completely equalized while trying to equalize the order notification. Become.

Feature I7. The specific number of setting values that can cause a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the privilege given by the privilege granting means is set, and one of the setting values of the specific number is set. It is equipped with a setting means (a function to execute a winning probability setting process by the main control device 101) to be set.
The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6, wherein the order notification set as the predetermined order notification differs depending on the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict the set value by using the remainder of the selectivity that is not divisible by 100%. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as predicting the set value by making good use of the part where the order notification cannot be completely equalized while trying to equalize the order notification. Become.

Feature I8. The selection means selects the sequence notification without including the sequence notification corresponding to the operation sequence corresponding to the first operation mode, or an operation that is the first operation mode rather than the sequence notification corresponding to another operation sequence. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein it is difficult to select order notification corresponding to the order.

According to the above configuration, if only the order notification at the time of winning the special result is obeyed, the 4th small winning combination prize will be established, and the 3rd small winning combination winning will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily obtain many benefits in an advantageous state.

Feature I9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (pushing order bell), the result corresponding to the special result (first small) by operating the stop operation means in the operation order according to the first operation mode. The winning combination (combination, second minor combination) can be established, and the stop operation means is operated in an operation order that does not correspond to the first operation mode, resulting in corresponding to the special result (third minor combination to third). It is set so that the prize of 6 small roles) can be established.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the order notification in which the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means corresponds to the operation order according to the first operation mode is the first. 1 The gaming machine according to feature I8, which is set to be higher than the order notification corresponding to the operation sequence that does not correspond to the operation mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to successfully cover the portion in which the order notification corresponding to the operation order, which is the first operation mode, is not performed when the special result is won by the order notification when the Tobetsu result is won. By doing so, it is possible to equalize the order notification throughout the game.

Feature I10. The specific stop operation means specified in advance is operated in the specific order, and the specific stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific pattern in the specific orbiter corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in the specific range. This is the first operation mode, in which a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated in the specific order, and the specific stop operation is performed. The second operation mode is set to operate the means in the specific order and operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific pattern in the specific orbiting body does not exist in the specific range. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9.

According to the above configuration, when the first operation mode is defined by the operation order and the operation timing, even if the operation order is the first operation mode, the second operation mode can be obtained as long as the operation timing is different. It is also possible to do. That is, in the configuration in which the operation order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first operation mode is selected, the third result prize is awarded depending on the operation timing when the order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first operation mode is performed. It is established or the 4th result prize is established. Therefore, if you want to acquire more benefits, you need to make full use of the operation timing, and by incorporating such a configuration into the game playability, the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature I11. The selection means has a plurality of operation sequences including the first operation sequence and the second operation sequence, at least based on a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result. Select the order notification corresponding to one operation sequence from the order notification corresponding to
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I10, wherein the sequence notification means executes the sequence notification selected at the predetermined opportunity when the special result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to overwhelmingly reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which the operation order is selected each time the special result is won.

Feature I12. The gaming machine according to feature I11, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs when the machine shifts to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since a predetermined opportunity occurs at the time of transition to an advantageous state, a special result is won, and there is no inconvenience that the selection is not completed even though the order notification should be executed, and the special result does not occur. Although the selection frequency is lower than that for each winning, for example, the selection frequency can be increased for a configuration-oriented structure that is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the order notification.

The invention described in the above features I1 to I12 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to the feature B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation can be established. When the means are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, the second result (9th small winning combination to 32nd) in which the privilege given by the privilege giving means is smaller than that in the first result. The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set, and
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the advantageous determination means for executing the advantageous determination that causes an advantageous event for the player (for example, the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function such as AT addition lottery processing)
The advantageous determination means sets the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of starting by the main control device 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state. Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT lottery processing when stopped)
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result. By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win a prize for the second result or a result corresponding to the second result, which is different from the first order result among the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result, while the stop operation means is described. By operating in the first operation order, it is set so that the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be won.
It is provided with an order notification means (a function of executing push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification regarding the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
In the order notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. While controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, if it is the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed. If it is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the third result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. While the first advantage determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the third result. It is possible to win a prize in the fourth result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the advantageous determination means causes the advantageous event rather than the first advantageous determination. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second advantageous determination is executed or the advantageous determination is not executed.
At least the operation of the stop operation means according to the first operation order is included in the second operation mode.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the specific order notification means (special by the main control device 101) capable of executing the order notification corresponding to the first operation order by the predetermined notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function to notify the push order when a winning combination is won.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, if the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of the second result prize, which has less benefits than when the first result is won, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order notification of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to realize excellent playability such that the advantages can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the order notification.

As the order result, the first order result and the second order result are set, and the operation order for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even if the order result is obtained, the order notification is set in such a manner that the first order result and the second order result cannot be discriminated before the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the operation order for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the advantage is enjoyed even before the transition in order to greatly change the advantage by the order notification when the transition to the advantageous state occurs.

Then, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the judgment result of the advantage determination causes an advantageous event. While the first advantage determination, which tends to give an advantageous result, is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. As an advantageous judgment, a special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to be an advantageous result is executed, and the player selects an advantageous degree of the advantageous judgment or selects the one with more benefits, which is extremely special. Playability can be added.

Moreover, the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result is a mode including the first operation order, and by utilizing the configuration, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is performed at the time of winning the special result during the advantageous state. I am doing it. As a result, in order to operate the second operation mode in order to acquire more benefits when the special result is won, it is not necessary to provide the notification dedicated to the special result by using the existing configuration such as the order notification in the order result. Moreover, since it is possible to mix the special result winning with the first order result at the time of order result winning, for example, the set value can be predicted from the winning probability of the special result, the winning probability of the order result, and the like. It is also possible to make the prediction difficult in the configuration. As a result of the above, it is possible to easily improve the interest of the game.

Features J2. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given to the effective position. When the pattern combination of 4 is stopped, the privilege corresponding to the 4th result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the first pattern combination is the same as or corresponding to the fourth pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop result is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed even at the time of winning the order result, the first result winning or the fourth result winning is based on the order result winning. Whether it is a thing or a cause of winning a special result cannot be determined from the outcome or order notification. By doing so, for example, it is difficult to make predictions in a configuration that can predict useful information for the player, such as predicting a set value from the winning probability of a special result or the winning probability of an order result. Is possible.

Feature J3. In the first order result, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result associated with the first order result can be established, while the stop operation means. By operating in the second operation order, the winning of the second result associated with the first order result can be established, and in the second order result, the stop operation means is changed to the second operation order. By operating in, the winning of the first result associated with the second order result can be established, while by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the second order result can be established. It is set so that the winning of the second result associated with the above can be established.
When the pattern combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result is stopped among the first pattern combinations corresponding to the first result at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the result is given. When the fourth pattern combination corresponding to the fourth result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the pattern combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result is the same as or corresponding to the pattern combination of the fourth pattern combination.

In the above configuration, when the order result is won in the feature J2, the result corresponding to the first result is won in each operation order, but strictly speaking, the result different in each operation order is won. It is a composition. Even in such a configuration, the special results are ordered by sharing the stop result of the 4th result winning at the time of winning the special result and the stop result of the result winning corresponding to the 1st result at the time of ordering the result. It is possible to enhance the effect of being confused with the result.

Features J4. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result is stopped at the effective position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the fourth result corresponds to the effective position. When the fourth pattern combination is stopped, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of feature J1 to feature J3, wherein the first privilege is the same privilege as the fourth privilege.

According to the above configuration, the privilege to be given is common to the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed even at the time of winning the order result, the first result winning or the fourth result winning is based on the order result winning. Whether it is a thing or a cause of winning a special result cannot be determined from the benefits and order notification given. By doing so, for example, it is difficult to make predictions in a configuration that can predict useful information for the player, such as predicting a set value from the winning probability of a special result or the winning probability of an order result. Is possible.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J2 to feature J4, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the features J2 to J4, and by achieving the same result in this way, excellent effects of the features J2 to J4 can be expected with an extremely simple configuration.

Features J6. The order notification mode corresponding to the first operation order executed by the order notification means triggered by the order result and the first operation sequence executed by the specific order notification means triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to feature J5, wherein the notification mode of the corresponding sequence notification is a common notification mode.

According to the above configuration, the notification mode of the order notification of the first operation order in the order result and the order notification of the first operation order in the special result are executed in the same notification mode. The effect of confusing the special result with the sequential result can be expected from the notification mode.

Feature J7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first order result in the advantageous state, the specific information which is the information about the first operation order or the information that the lottery result is the first order result is displayed by another control device (display). A first output means that can be output to the control device 81) (a function that executes a process of outputting and setting a push order command for the sixth small winning combination when the push order bell is won by the main control device 101).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the second output means (push order bell winning by the main control device 101) capable of outputting the specific information to the other control device is won. Sometimes a function to output and set the push order command for the 6th small role),
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J1 to the feature J6.

According to the above configuration, when the order notification of the first operation order is performed at the time of winning the order result, the specific information which is the information about the first operation order and the information that it is the first order result is sent to other control devices. Even if the order notification of the first operation order is performed when the special result is won, the specific information is output to other control devices, so not only the order notification but also the specific information is output. Even if it is analyzed illegally, it cannot be determined whether it is an order result or a special result. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult for an act or the like to obtain a profit by improperly determining the result.

Features J8. The other control device is a specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 or a speaker 64) that executes a specific notification (push order notification) corresponding to the first operation order based on the specific information. It is equipped with a function to execute a push order notification effect by the display control device 81).
The specific notification means executes the specific notification in a common notification mode depending on whether the specific information is output triggered by the order result or the specific information is output triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to the feature J7, which is characterized in that it does.

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible to determine whether the specific notification on the specific notification means side is triggered by the order result or the special result, and the effect of the feature J1 is more preferable. It becomes possible to play.

Features J9. The probability that the advantageous result will be obtained in the advantageous determination based on the order result or the advantage of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained, and the probability that the advantageous result will be obtained in the advantageous determination based on the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J1 to feature J8, characterized in that the degree of advantage of the advantageous event is different from the case where the advantageous result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability and advantage of the advantage judgment based on the order result and the winning probability and advantage of the advantage judgment based on the special result winning are different, the order notification at the time of winning the special result is the order of the order result. By using the configuration that mixes the special result winning with the order notification by using the notification, it makes us think that the advantageous event occurs based on the special result, or conversely, the special result. It is possible to make it think that an advantageous event will occur based on the sequence result.

Features J10. The probability that the advantageous result will be obtained in the advantageous determination based on the order result or the probability that the advantageous result will be obtained in the advantageous determination based on the special result rather than the advantage of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature J9, wherein the advantage of the advantageous event is higher when the advantageous result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to give the impression that an advantageous event occurs based on the special result and that an advantageous event occurs based on the sequential result. In other words, it is possible to give the player an impression that the order result can be a powerful trigger for an advantageous event, as well as the function of differentiating the privilege given depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, and the game using the order result can be used. It can greatly improve the interest.

Features J11. The gaming machine according to feature J10, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the special result.

Since the order result is easier to win than the special result as in the above configuration, normally, if such an order result is used as a trigger for an advantageous event, inconveniences such as a soaring ball output rate may occur. .. In that respect, like the above-mentioned features J1 and J10, by using special results to raise expectations for advantageous events for order results, it is easy to win while avoiding a rise in the payout rate. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the order result.

The invention described in the above features J1 to J11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J11, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the advantage determination means for executing the advantage determination that causes an advantageous event for the player (for example, the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function such as AT addition lottery processing)
The advantageous determination means sets the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of starting by the main control device 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state. Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT lottery processing when stopped)
Corresponds to the case where the number of games from a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) reaches the specific number of games, and the result of the transition determination shifts to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means. Even if the result is different from the transition result, the AT mode winning flag is set based on the specific transition means (the ceiling counter by the main control device 101 becomes 0) that executes the transition process for transitioning to the advantageous state. Function to execute the processing to be performed) and
A grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101) for grasping the game number information corresponding to the game number from a predetermined opportunity, and
An update means (a function of executing a subtraction process from the ceiling counter by the main control device 101) for updating the game number information according to the progress of the game from the predetermined opportunity, and
The game number notification means (display control device 81) that notifies the number of games from the predetermined opportunity as a game number notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) and updates the game number notification according to the progress of the game. Advantageous section game number image AP display function) and
When a specific condition (operating in the second operation mode when the special combination is won, limitation of the special combination) is satisfied in the game from the predetermined opportunity, the update of the game number information by the update means is restricted or the update is performed. The special combination winning game by the specific processing means (main control device 101) that executes the specific processing that makes it difficult for the game number information to become the specific information (ceiling counter = 0) corresponding to the specific game number than when the update is performed by the means. (A function to execute a process to prevent the ceiling counter from being subtracted when operated in the second operation mode) and
Equipped with
The specific transfer means has a configuration in which the transfer process is executed when the game number information becomes the specific information.
The game number notification means updates the game number notification even for a game in which the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means.
When the game number notification by the game number notification means is the notification corresponding to the specific game number, and when the number of games until the game number information becomes the specific information is the specific number or less, the first specific When the notification (first precursor mode effect) is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means, and the number of games until the game number information becomes the specific information is larger than the specific number, the above A specific notification means (stop sign effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification (third precursor mode effect) different from the first specific notification by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means. A game machine characterized by having a function to execute.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In the so-called slot machine gaming machine to which the privilege corresponding to the result of May shift to an advantageous state when it reaches a specific number of games. In other words, in order to add not only the lottery of each game but also the playability aiming at an advantageous state, when the number of games reaches a specific number of games, a so-called ceiling is provided so as to shift to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination. By setting this, it becomes possible to make it difficult to stop the game in the middle and to support the continuation of the game.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a game from a predetermined opportunity, the update of the game number information corresponding to the number of games may be restricted, while the game number notification indicating the number of games from the predetermined opportunity is specified. Since the update is performed even if the condition is satisfied, the game number information side has not reached the specific information corresponding to the ceiling even though the game number notification side has reached the specific game number corresponding to the ceiling. Can occur.

When such an event occurs, the player is expected to perform the process for transitioning to an advantageous state by reaching a specific number of games, but the game is not performed. It is undeniable that there is a possibility that the game will end even though the game has been played to that extent due to anxiety.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games, the number of games until the number of games information reaches the specific information is grasped, and if the number of games is less than or equal to the specific number, the first specific notification is sent. By executing and executing the second specific notification if there are more than the specific number, it is possible to understand that the game so far was not wasted, and the type of specific notification how soon it will reach the ceiling It becomes possible to grasp from. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature K2. When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, a means for shifting to the advantageous state after executing a predetermined number of games (a function of executing a process of setting the number of precursor games by the main control device 101). )When,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, special notification is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. Means (a function of executing the start precursor effect setting process by the display control device 81) and
Equipped with
The special notification means executes the first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is equal to or less than the specific number, and when the predetermined number of games is larger than the specific number, the special notification means the first special notification. Execute a second special notification that is different from the first special notification,
The notification mode of the first specific notification executed by the specific notification means is the same as the notification mode of the first special notification executed by the special notification means, or the notification mode of the first special notification. The notification mode of the second specific notification executed by the specific notification means is the second special notification executed by the special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that the notification mode is the same as the notification mode, or the notification mode is set so as to be a notification mode that is difficult for the player to distinguish from the notification mode of the second special notification.

According to the above configuration, when the game number notification reaches the specific game number and the specific notification is performed, it is apparently a special notification when the game number is won by the transition judgment and the state shifts to the advantageous state before reaching the specific game number. Specific notification will be performed in the same notification mode. By doing so, it is not necessary to separately store the data of the notification mode as the specific notification for reaching the ceiling, the storage capacity can be reduced, and the player will be in an advantageous state in how much more. It will be possible to clearly understand whether or not to migrate.

Feature K3. As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode) and a second advantageous state (CZ mode) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are set.
The specific transition means is configured to transition to the first advantageous state.
The special notification means is a result corresponding to the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means shifting to the first advantageous state, and when the predetermined number of games is larger than the specific number, the special notification means. The second special notification is executed, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means corresponds to the transition to the second advantageous state, and when the predetermined number of games is larger than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that a third special notification different from the second special notification is executed as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the notification mode of the second specific notification executed when the number of games to the ceiling is larger than the specific number after the game notification reaches the specific number of games is advantageous in normal times. The notification mode is the same as the notification mode of the second special notification executed when the transition to the first advantageous state occurs. By doing so, the player's impatience and irritation that the player does not easily shift to the advantageous state even though he / she has reached the ceiling on the display is notified that the transition to the first advantageous state is confirmed (No. 1). (2 specific notification, second special notification) can be followed well, and the player's feelings until the transition to the first advantageous state occurs can be eased.

Features K4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the first result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. While the first advantage determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the first result. It is possible to win a prize in the second result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the advantageous determination means causes the advantageous event rather than the first advantageous determination. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second advantageous determination is executed or the advantageous determination is not executed.
The specific processing means can execute the specific processing by assuming that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode as the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature K1 to the feature K3.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and the judgment result of the advantage determination becomes an advantageous result corresponding to causing an advantageous event. While the easy first advantage determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second result winning with more benefits than the first result winning can be established, but as an advantage determination. A special result is set in which the second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to be an advantageous result is executed, and the player has extremely special playability such as whether to select the advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with the most benefits. Can be added.

Moreover, if the operation is performed in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the specific process in which the update of the game number information is restricted is executed. Therefore, in the second operation mode, only the second advantageous determination on the disadvantageous side is performed. Instead, this game does not contribute to the number of games up to the ceiling. That is, even if the player wants to obtain the second privilege, it is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the playability of shifting to an advantageous state when the operation is performed in the second operation mode.

However, it is assumed that a player who does not understand the distinction between the first operation mode and the second operation mode and a player who cannot intentionally distinguish between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and a game in which the second privilege is obtained. It is the player's freedom to choose, and if the above-mentioned special result is provided, a discrepancy between the number of games displayed on the ceiling and the actual number of games is likely to occur.

Therefore, if the specific notification is performed according to the actual number of games up to the ceiling when the game number notification reaches the specific number of games as in the above feature K1, various games due to such special results can be obtained. It is possible to expect excellent effects such as making the player understand that the game will reach the ceiling soon and grasping the number of games to the ceiling from the specific notification, while obtaining the effect of the change.

Feature K5. When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, a means for shifting to the advantageous state after executing a predetermined number of games (a function of executing a process of setting the number of precursor games by the main control device 101). )When,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, special notification is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. Means (a function of executing the start precursor effect setting process by the display control device 81) and
Equipped with
The average number of times the lottery result by the lottery means when the game of the specific number of games is played becomes the special result, and the specific process is not performed when the specific process is performed based on the special result. The feature K4 is characterized in that the product of the average difference from the update number from the game number information updated by the update means is set to be equal to or less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the actual number of games to the ceiling when the game number notification reaches the specific number of games, even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode each time when the special result is won, is determined. It is easy to be within the predetermined number of games for which special notification is given when a player wins in the transition judgment at the normal time. By doing so, even if the configuration is such that the specific notification is started when the ceiling on the display is reached, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from being performed for too long, which is a feature. In a configuration such as K2 in which the notification mode of the special notification is diverted to the specific notification, the diversion can be performed extremely smoothly.

Features K6. The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process so as to shift from the game in which the game number information becomes the specific information to the advantageous state after the game of the specific game number.
The specific process was not performed when the specific process was performed based on the average number of times the lottery result by the lottery means was the special result when the game of the specific number of games was performed and the special result. In the case, the number of games obtained by adding the specific number of games to the product of the number of updates from the number of games updated by the updating means and the average difference is equal to or less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to feature K5, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the above configuration, when the ceiling is reached, the game shifts to an advantageous state after a specific number of games, and in consideration of such a specific number of games, the second operation mode is set every time the special result is won. Even when the game is operated, a special notification is given when the number of games reaches a specific number of games and the actual number of games up to the ceiling is won in the normal transition judgment. It tends to be within the number. Therefore, after reaching the ceiling, after providing a grace period for directing etc. before the transition to the advantageous section as the specific number of games, the above effect can be diverted even if the specific number of games exceeds the ceiling on the display as it is. Can be expected. By doing so, it is possible to optimize the production up to the transition to the advantageous state without inviting complicated processing or an increase in the amount of data.

Feature K7. In the updating means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated by the first operation mode, the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the special result. The feature K4 to the feature K6 is characterized in that the game number information can be updated so that the difference becomes larger than the difference before and after the update when the game number information is updated in a certain case. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the game number information can be updated more than in the case of other lottery results. Therefore, when the special result is won, the operation in the first operation mode accelerates the arrival at the ceiling, while the operation in the second operation mode delays the arrival at the ceiling. The result is both extremes. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation mode at the time of winning the special result more carefully, and it is possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Features K8. The second operation mode is characterized in that the operation difficulty level is lower than that of the first operation mode (the first operation mode needs to make full use of the operation timing in addition to the operation order). Features The gaming machine described in K7.

According to the above configuration, if the operation mode is not fully utilized, the second operation mode is likely to occur when the special result is won, and the specific process tends to cause a difference between reaching the ceiling on the display and reaching the actual ceiling. Therefore, it is considered highly significant to adopt a configuration such as the feature K1 for such a configuration.

Features K9. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the advantage determination means for executing the advantage determination that causes an advantageous event for the player (for example, the start AT lottery process and the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to the instruction function such as AT addition lottery processing)
The advantageous determination means sets the transition from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of starting by the main control device 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state. Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and AT lottery processing when stopped)
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, special notification is given by a predetermined notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. (A function to execute the start sign effect setting process by the display control device 81) is provided.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the first result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the transition determination by the transition determination means. While the first transition determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the first result. It is possible to win a prize for the second result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the transition determination by the transition determination means is less likely to result in the transition result than the first transition determination. Is executed or the transition judgment is not executed. A special result (special combination) is set.
When the number of games from a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) reaches a specific number of games, the result of the transition determination is different from the transition result without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means. Also, the specific transition means for executing the transition process for transitioning to the advantageous state (the function of executing the process of setting the AT mode winning flag based on the ceiling counter of the main control device 101 becoming 0).
A grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101) for grasping the game number information corresponding to the game number from a predetermined opportunity, and
An update means (a function of executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter by the main control device 101) for updating the game number information according to the progress of the game from the predetermined opportunity, and
The game number notification means (display control device 81) that notifies the number of games from the predetermined opportunity as a game number notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) and updates the game number notification according to the progress of the game. Advantageous section game number image AP display function) and
Equipped with
The specific transfer means has a configuration in which the transfer process is executed when the game number information becomes the specific information corresponding to the specific game number.
The game number notification means updates the game number notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is the game operated in the second operation mode.
The special notification means can execute the first special notification (first precursor mode effect) and the second special notification (third precursor mode effect) as the special notification, and the advantage of the advantageous state to be shifted is high. The configuration is such that the second special notification is easier to execute than the first special notification.
By operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the game number notification by the game number notification means corresponds to the specific game number. In the case of notification, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second special notification is easily executed by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In the so-called slot machine gaming machine to which the privilege corresponding to the result of May shift to an advantageous state when it reaches a specific number of games. In other words, in order to add not only the lottery of each game but also the playability aiming at an advantageous state, when the number of games reaches a specific number of games, a so-called ceiling is provided so as to shift to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination. By setting this, it becomes possible to make it difficult to stop the game in the middle and to support the continuation of the game.

Further, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and the determination result of the transition determination tends to be the transition result that causes the transition to the advantageous state. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second result winning, which has more benefits than the first result winning, can be established, but the transition result is unlikely to be obtained. 2 A special result for executing the transition judgment is set, and the player can add extremely special playability such as whether to select the advantage of the transition judgment or the one with the most benefits. ..

In this case, it is considered that the operation should be performed in the first operation mode when the special result is won in order to cause the transition to the advantageous state, but some players mistakenly perform the second operation even if the first operation mode is used. There is a possibility that it will be an aspect, and if a special result is provided in the game playability aiming at the transition to an advantageous state, it is difficult to guarantee the fairness of the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the second special notification corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state when reaching the ceiling is easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to successfully follow the player who has mistakenly operated in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K8 to the above-mentioned feature K9, and a part or all of the respective technical ideas. It is also possible to apply in combination.

The invention described in the above features K1 to K9 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation means can be established. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operating mode, the second result (9th small combination) in which the privilege given by the privilege granting means is smaller than that in the first result. The mode result (pushing order bell) that enables the winning of the ~ 32nd small role) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the mode, the mode notification means (push by the main control device 101) for executing the mode notification for the operation mode including any one of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Function to execute sequential notification) and
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
Equipped with
As a game state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed or the mode notification is less likely to be executed than the specific state. The state (normal section) and is set,
The specific processing means includes, as the specific process, a transition determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination for shifting from the normal state to the specific state.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the third result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the transition determination by the transition determination means. While the first transition determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the third result. It is possible to win a prize for the fourth result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the transition determination means shifts to the specific state rather than the first transition determination. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second migration determination that is unlikely to result in the corresponding migration result is executed or the migration determination is not executed.
The transition determination means is more advantageous when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific combination). A gaming machine characterized in that it can be transferred to an advantageous section (to reach).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, while the second operation mode. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of the second result prize, which has less benefits than when the first result prize is won. Since the mode notification as the notification is performed, it is possible to realize excellent playability such that the advantages can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification.

Then, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the first transition judgment is executed as the transition judgment to the specific state. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established, but the transition judgment is more specific than the first transition judgment. A special result is set in which the second transition judgment is executed or the transition judgment is not executed, which is unlikely to be the transition result corresponding to the transition, and the player chooses to transition to a specific state or has many benefits. It is possible to add extremely special playability such as choosing one.

Then, to the specific state in which the mode notification can be executed, when the transition result is obtained by the transition determination by the migration determination means in the specific process, the transition determination is executed when the specific result is won. Predetermined result It is easy to result in a transition to a specific state that is more advantageous than when it is executed with the winning as an opportunity.

Then, by utilizing the fact that the content of the transition judgment and the privilege obtained differ depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result as described above, the operation is performed in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result, and the second privilege is acquired. However, it is also possible to play a game that does not cause a transition to a specific state and does not cause a transition to a specific state until the lottery result becomes a specific result. It can greatly contribute to diversification.

Feature L2. The transition determination means is more likely to shift to a specific state that is advantageous to the player when shifting to the specific state based on the specific result than when shifting to the specific state based on the special result. The gaming machine according to the feature L1.

According to the above configuration, the significance of waiting for the specific result winning without shifting to the specific state at the time of winning the special result is further clarified. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the special playability of the above feature L1.

Feature L3. When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the setting means (a function of executing the setting process of the number of ceiling games by the main control device 101) for setting the advantage of the specific state to be migrated is provided. ,
The setting means is characterized in that it is easy to set the specific state that shifts based on the specific result to be more advantageous than the specific state that shifts based on the predetermined result. The gaming machine described in L2.

As in the above configuration, by providing the setting means separately from the migration determination means, the functions can be distributed to each means, and the occurrence of an error or the like due to an increase in the processing load can be suppressed.

Feature L4. The game value required to execute the game is set as a specific number (3 cards), and
The privilege given when the winning of the fourth result is established is described in any one of the features L1 to L3, which is characterized in that it corresponds to a game value (8 pieces) that is twice or more the specified number. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the game in which the special result is won is operated in the second operation mode and the result of the transfer determination is the transfer result, the game required in the game is required. Since the value and the game value higher than the required game value can be obtained in the next game, the game is less likely to be wasted, and rather the game performance waiting for the specific result of the feature L1 is realized without considering the decrease in the game value. Can be made to.

Feature L5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the specific state, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first specific process is executed as the specific process, while the first specific process is executed. When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second specific process, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process, is executed or the specific process is not executed as the specific process. It is a composition,
The third result and the fourth result are awarded so that the case where the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode is more advantageous to the player than the case where the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L4, characterized in that the privilege in the case of the above, the first specific process and the second specific process are set.

According to the above configuration, after shifting to the specific state, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode when the special result is won than to operate in the second operation mode. By doing so, in the special result winning before the specific state transition, the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and in the special result winning after the specific state transition, the operation is performed in the first operation mode. It is possible to realize extremely special playability that recommends the exact opposite operation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game by using such a configuration.

Feature L6. As the specific state, the first specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is easily executed, and the mode notification by the mode notification means becomes more difficult or not executed than the first specific state. The second specific state (normal mode) is set,
A specific transition determination means (a function of executing a start AT lottery process or a stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination for shifting from the second specific state to the first specific state. Prepare,
The first specific process and the second specific process include a migration determination by the specific migration determination means.
When the first specific process is executed as the migration determination by the specific migration determination means, the specific migration result of shifting to the first specific state is obtained as compared with the case where the second specific process is executed. The gaming machine according to feature L5, which is characterized by an easy configuration.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature L5.

Feature L7. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation means can be established. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operating mode, the second result (9th small combination) in which the privilege given by the privilege granting means is smaller than that in the first result. The mode result (pushing order bell) that enables the winning of the ~ 32nd small role) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the mode, the mode notification means (push by the main control device 101) for executing the mode notification for the operation mode including any one of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Function to execute sequential notification) and
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
Equipped with
As a game state, a specific state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed or the mode notification is less likely to be executed than the specific state. The state (normal section) and is set,
It is provided with a transition determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a transition determination for shifting from the normal state to the specific state.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a prize of the third result (33rd small winning combination) can be established, and as the specific processing by the specific processing means. While the first specific process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege granting means rather than the third result. It is possible to win a prize for the fourth result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination), and the specific processing by the specific processing means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific processing. A special result (special role) is set in which the second specific process is executed or the specific process is not executed.
The transition determination means is more advantageous when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific combination). When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the shift determination is executed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, while the second operation mode. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of the second result prize, which has less benefits than when the first result prize is won. Since the mode notification as the notification is performed, it is possible to realize excellent playability such that the advantages can be greatly different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification.

Then, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the transition judgment to the specific state and the advantage of the specific state are set. While the first specific process is executed as a specific process such as, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, it is possible to establish the fourth result prize, which has more benefits than the third result prize. However, as a specific process, a special result is set in which the second specific process, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process, is executed or the specific process is not executed, and the player shifts to the specific state. It is possible to add extremely special playability such as whether to select the one with the most benefits or the one with the most benefits.

Then, to a specific state in which the mode notification can be executed, when the transition result is obtained by the transition determination by the transition determination means, the person who is executed with the specific result winning as the trigger in the transition determination is triggered by the predetermined result winning. It is likely to result in a transition to a specific state that is more advantageous than when executed as.

Then, by utilizing the fact that the content of the specific process and the privilege obtained differ depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result as described above, the operation is performed in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result, and the second privilege is acquired. However, it may be possible to play a game in which the transition to a specific state is not caused and the transition to a specific state is not generated until the lottery result becomes a specific result.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the transition determination based on the special result, the transition determination is executed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, so that the transition to the specific state is performed while acquiring the second privilege as described above. It is possible to prevent such actions as avoiding. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be suitably guaranteed.

The invention described in the above features L1 to L7 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
Equipped with
In a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific processing means executes the first specific process as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed or the specific process is performed as the specific process. It is set not to run,
As the special result, a first special result (special combination A) and a second special result (special combination B) different from the first special result are set.
The first operation mode (the operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) for the first special result is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result, and the second operation mode is set. The gaming machine characterized in that the first operation mode (operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is first operated) for the special result is set to be the second operation mode for the first special result. ..

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and as a specific process related to the mode notification function. While the first specific process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function. A special result is set, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, while the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process. In the case of, the player is entrusted with the selection of the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) of the mode notification function. It is possible to realize a high level of playability.

Moreover, in the above configuration, a plurality of special results are provided, the first operation mode for the first special result becomes the second operation mode for the second special result, and the first operation mode for the second special result is the first special operation mode. Since it is set to be the second operation mode for the result, even a player who continuously plays the game in the first operation mode for the first special result can use the first operation mode in the first special result. A player who can enjoy not only the benefits of the above but also the benefits of the second operation mode in the second special result, and who continuously plays the game in the second operation mode of the first special result. In addition, it is possible to enjoy not only the benefits of the second operation mode in the first special result but also the benefits of the first operation mode in the second special result. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel playability using the above-mentioned special result while ensuring fairness among players.

Features M2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the first specific notification corresponding to the first operation mode for the first special result (pushing order at the time of winning a special combination in the normal mode or the CZ mode). When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the first specific notification (normally) corresponding to the first operation mode for the second special result is executed by the predetermined notification means. The AT mode flag is set in the first specific notification means (the lottery result correspondence process by the main control device 101) that executes the push order notification effect at the time of winning the special combination in the mode or CZ mode by the predetermined notification means. It is characterized by having a function to execute a process of outputting and setting a push order notification command at the time of winning special roles A to C, and a function of executing a process of performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81). Features The gaming machine described in M1.

According to the above configuration, while assuming a game in which a plurality of special results are provided and operated not only in the first operation mode but also in the second operation mode, when the first special result is won, the first operation mode is adopted. It is also possible to perform a game such as operating in the first operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of playability with one gaming machine, and it is up to the player to follow the notification by the first specific notification means, so that the first is the first when the special result is won. It is also possible for the player to select whether to perform the game to be operated not only in the operation mode but also in the second operation mode, or to perform the game to be operated in the first operation mode according to each special result. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features M3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation means can be established. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operating mode, the second result (9th small combination) in which the privilege given by the privilege granting means is smaller than that in the first result. The mode result (pushing order bell) that enables the winning of the ~ 32nd small role) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the aspect result, the aspect notification means can execute the aspect notification regarding the operation mode including any one of the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
The feature M2 is characterized in that the notification mode of the first specific notification by the first specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are different so as to be identifiable by the player. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result prize can be established, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first result prize is won. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of a second result winning with less benefits than, and the mode notification as the push order notification of the push order combination is performed, so that it is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. It is possible to realize excellent playability such that the degree can be greatly different. In such a game, when the first specific notification for notifying the first operation mode for the special result is added to the game, the first result winning on the advantageous side can be established when the operation is performed according to the mode notification. Assuming that, similarly, from the relationship between the mode notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop operation means and the first specific notification, the second privilege on the advantageous side can be obtained even when the operation is performed according to the first specific notification. In that case, the player may misunderstand. In that respect, as in the above configuration, since the notification modes of the mode notification and the first specific notification are different so that the player can identify them, it is disadvantageous when operated according to the first specific notification. Even when the first privilege is obtained, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort. Then, by operating in the first operation mode while performing as described above, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player can perform the first specific processing on the advantageous side without discomfort.

Features M4. The first operation mode for the first special result includes a plurality of operation modes.
The first operation mode for the second special result includes a plurality of operation modes.
The first specific notification means is a means for executing the first specific notification corresponding to one of the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the first special result, and the first special notification means. The means for executing the first specific notification corresponding to the operation mode different from the operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the result, and the second special result. The means for executing the first specific notification corresponding to one of the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode, and the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the second special result. The gaming machine according to feature M2 or feature M3, which comprises means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the above-mentioned one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode for the first special result and the first operation mode for the second special result are set to include a plurality of operation modes, and each of these special result winnings. Since the first specific notification that sometimes notifies the first operation mode is set so that each operation mode may be executed, even if the first operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes, the first operation mode may be executed. It is possible to avoid an event in which the notified operation mode is biased. Therefore, the reliability of the first specific notification can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature M5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the second specific notification corresponding to the second operation mode for the first special result (push order notification effect at the time of winning a special combination in AT mode). Is executed by a predetermined notification means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the second specific notification (in AT mode) corresponding to the second operation mode for the second special result. Special role A in the situation where the AT mode flag is set in the second specific notification means (the lottery result correspondence process by the main control device 101) that executes the push order notification effect when the special combination is won by the predetermined notification means. ~ C Features M1 to M4 characterized by having a function to execute a process of outputting and setting a push order notification command at the time of winning, and a function of executing a process of performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, while assuming a game in which a plurality of special results are provided and operated not only in the first operation mode but also in the second operation mode, when the first special result is won, the second operation mode is adopted. It is also possible to perform a game in which the player is operated in the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of playability with one gaming machine, and it is up to the player to follow the notification by the second specific notification means, so that the first is the first when the special result is won. It is also possible for the player to select whether to perform the game to be operated not only in the operation mode but also in the second operation mode, or to perform the game to be operated in the second operation mode according to each special result. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features M6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result (first small winning combination to sixth small winning combination) can be won, while the stopping operation means can be established. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operating mode, the second result (9th small combination) in which the privilege given by the privilege granting means is smaller than that in the first result. The mode result (pushing order bell) that enables the winning of the ~ 32nd small role) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the aspect result, the aspect notification means can execute the aspect notification regarding the operation mode including any one of the first operation mode and the second operation mode.
The feature M5 is characterized in that the notification mode of the second specific notification by the second specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are set so as to be difficult for the player to distinguish. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result prize can be established, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first result prize is won. There is a so-called push order combination that enables the establishment of a second result winning with less benefits than, and the mode notification as the push order notification of the push order combination is performed, so that it is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification. It is possible to realize excellent playability such that the degree can be greatly different. In such a game, when the second specific notification for notifying the second operation mode for the special result is added to the game playability, the first result winning on the advantageous side can be established when the operation is performed according to the mode notification. On the premise of the above, the second privilege on the advantageous side can be obtained even when the operation is performed according to the second specific notification. Since the notification modes of the mode notification and the second specific notification are set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish them, it is advantageous for the player to follow the notification without being particularly conscious of which notification. It is possible to perform operations on the other side.

Feature M7. The second operation mode for the first special result includes a plurality of operation modes.
The second operation mode for the second special result includes a plurality of operation modes.
The second specific notification means is a means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to one of the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the first special result, and the first special notification means. A means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the result, and the above-mentioned second special result. The means for executing the second specific notification corresponding to one of the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode, and the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the second special result. The gaming machine according to feature M5 or feature M6, which comprises means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the above-mentioned one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the second operation mode for the first special result and the second operation mode for the second special result are set to include a plurality of operation modes, and each of these special result winnings. Since the second specific notification that sometimes notifies the second operation mode is set so that each operation mode may be executed, even if the second operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes, the second operation mode may be executed. It is possible to avoid an event in which the notified operation mode is biased. Therefore, the reliability of the second specific notification can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Features M8. The first specific process and the lottery means executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. The lottery result by the second special result is the first specific process executed by the specific processing means when the stop operation means is operated by the first operation mode, and the lottery by the lottery means. The result is the first special result, and the second specific processing executed by the specific processing means and the lottery result by the lottery means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode are described above. It is a second special result, and at least one of the second specific process executed by the specific process means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode is different from the process. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M7, which is set to (FIG. 93, 94).

According to the above configuration, since the content of the specific process to be executed differs depending on the operation mode between the first special result and the second special result, the first operation mode and the second operation are similarly set. Even if the operation is performed in the mode, the benefit of the specific processing regarding the function of the mode notification by the mode notification means differs depending on the special result of winning. Therefore, while increasing the degree of attention to which special result, it is possible to draw attention to which special result the first operation mode (second operation mode) is for the operation mode to be executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features M9. The lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and the first privilege and the lottery means given by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated by the first operation mode. The lottery result is the second special result, and the first privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are The first special result, the second privilege given by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second special results. As a result, at least one of the second privilege given by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode is set to be a different privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M8, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, since the first special result and the second special result are set so that the privilege to be executed differs depending on the operation mode, the first operation mode and the second operation are similarly set. Even if you operate in the mode, the benefits you can get will differ depending on the special result you win. Therefore, while increasing the degree of attention to which special result, it is possible to draw attention to which special result the first operation mode (second operation mode) is for the operation mode to be executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features M10. Means that make it difficult for the player to identify whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (when the special combinations A to C in the AT mode by the main control device 101 are won). The gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M9, which is provided with a function of notifying the operation order instead of the notification for a special role).

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is the first special result or the second special result, and whether the operation mode being operated is the first operation mode when the first special result is won. Second special result It becomes impossible to distinguish whether it is the second operation mode at the time of winning. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel playability such as playing a game while predicting which result the operation corresponds to.

In particular, in configurations such as feature M8 and feature M9 in which specific processes and benefits executed by special results are different, the player's profit can be significantly different depending on which result is supported. It is possible to improve the fun of predicting which one's own operation corresponds to.

Features M11. Means that allow the player to identify whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (when the special combinations A to C before the shift to the AT mode by the main control device 101 are won). Is a gaming machine according to any one of the feature M1 to the feature M10, which is characterized by having a function of notifying a special role.

According to the above configuration, the player can identify whether it is the first special result or the second special result, and whether the operation mode being operated is the first operation mode when the first special result is won. Second special result It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the second operation mode at the time of winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to play the game while grasping which result the operation corresponds to, and it becomes possible to perform the operation more carefully.

In particular, in configurations such as feature M8 and feature M9 in which specific processes and benefits executed by special results are different, the player's profit can be significantly different depending on which result is supported. It is also more important to understand which one of the operations corresponds to, and it is highly significant to apply the above configuration.

Features M12. As the special result, a third special result (special combination C) different from the first special result and the second special result is set.
The first operation mode (operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) for the first special result is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result and the third special result. The first operation mode (the operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) for the second special result becomes the second operation mode for the first special result and the third special result. The first operation mode (the operation mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first) for the third special result is set to the first special result and the second operation mode for the second special result. It is set to be
The stop operation means is composed of a first stop operation means, a second stop operation means, and a third stop operation means.
The first operation mode for the first special result is to operate the first stop operation means in a specific order, and the first operation mode for the second special result is to operate the second stop operation means. Any of the features M1 to M11 characterized in that the operation is performed in a specific order, and the first operation mode for the third special result is to operate the third stop operating means in the specific order. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, as many special results as the number of stop operation means are provided, and which stop operation means is operated in the specific order is set as the first operation mode for each special result. By doing so, in terms of playability such as predicting which special result is won and further operating in which operation mode, only which stop operation means should be operated in the specific order. It becomes possible to lower the difficulty level in the novel game and entertain the game to many players.

The invention described in the above features M1 to M12 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J8, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C12, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to feature G9, feature H1 to feature H8, feature I1 to feature I12, feature J1 to feature J8, feature K1 to feature K9, feature L1 to feature L7, feature M1 to feature M12, feature N1 to feature N11. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 or 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44).
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A mode result (pushing order bell, special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
The specific notification means (function of the display control device 81 to execute the start CZ effect setting process and the stop CZ effect setting process) for executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific process by the specific processing means.
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
To perform doublet effect and doublet effect by the first specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on the first trigger (third stop operation). Function to execute processing) and
When the cherry is won by the second specific notification means (display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on the second trigger (operation of the start lever 41) different from the first trigger. (Function to execute processing to perform final effect) and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the notification control of the specific notification by the first specific notification means and the notification control of the specific notification by the second specific notification means are different.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, the first privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, while the stop operation means is given in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is given when the operation is performed in, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. Therefore, when the special result is obtained, the stop operation is performed. It is possible to make the advantage different depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the playability in which the privilege given by such an operation mode may differ, the specific process relating to the mode notification regarding the operation mode is executed based on the first trigger, and the second trigger. Since the notification control of the specific notification corresponding to the specific processing is different depending on the case where the specific processing is executed, the player predicts the result of the specific processing from the specific notification based on any of the triggers. It can be noticed including the specific processing, and it can be applied to the game performance with different results and contents of the specific processing depending on the opportunity. It will be useful.

Feature N2. The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special combination), the first specific processing means (for example, the main control device 101) that executes the specific processing after the operation of the stop operation means as the first trigger. Function to execute AT lottery processing at the start) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, the second specific processing means for executing the specific process before the operation of the stop operation means as the second trigger. (For example, a function of executing the stop AT lottery process by the main control device 101) and
Equipped with
The first specific notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific notification at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result.
The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification as the specific notification before the specific timing in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (during the first stop ON operation). The gaming machine according to feature N1, which is characterized in that it does.

According to the above configuration, in the playability in which the privilege given may differ depending on the operation mode, the specific process relating to the mode notification regarding the operation mode is performed, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the operation of the stop operation means is performed. The first result is to be executed later, and if it is the second result, it is executed after the operation of the stop operation means, and if it is the first result, the first result corresponding to the specific process at the specific timing after the operation. When the specific notification is executed and the second result is obtained, the second specific notification corresponding to the specific process is executed before the specific timing. Therefore, the lottery result and the execution timing of the specific process are associated with each other, and the lottery is performed. After predicting and grasping the execution timing of the specific process from the result, it is necessary to realize an interesting playability in which the hand operating the stop operation means is strengthened so that the result of the specific process is advantageous to the player. Can be done.

Feature N3. The first result is the aspect result.
The specific processing means executes the first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed or the specific process is executed as the specific process. It is set not to
In the first game, after the branch timing (first stop ON operation) in which the operation of each of the stop operation means which is the operation mode of the first operation mode or the second operation mode is performed. It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a process for performing a tempai effect by the display control device 81) so that a notification corresponding to the specific process is performed before the specific timing. The gaming machine according to the feature N2.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result is the first result, the first privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the first specific process is performed as the specific process related to the mode notification function. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function, so that the first result is obtained. In this case, the player is entrusted with the selection of the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege given by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) of the mode notification function. It is possible to realize.

Then, in the first game in which the first specific notification is executed at a specific timing after the operation, the specific process is supported after the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode and before the specific timing. Since the notification to be performed may be executed, it is possible to execute the notification corresponding to the specific process as soon as possible, but it is understood whether the notification should be the first operation mode or the second operation mode. You can prevent it from happening. That is, for example, if the result of the specific process can be detected in advance, the second operation is performed so as to acquire the second privilege although the second specific process is performed if the detected result is not preferable for the player. Although it is conceivable to operate in the mode, the above-mentioned action is less likely to be performed by generating the notification corresponding to the specific process after the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode as described above. .. Therefore, it is possible to start the notification corresponding to the specific process in the first game from an earlier stage while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature N4. The first result is the aspect result.
The specific processing means executes the first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed or the specific process is executed as the specific process. It is set not to
In the second game, if it is the first game, the branch timing for performing the operation of each of the stop operation means, which operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode. It is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process for performing a final effect at the time of winning a cherry by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification corresponding to the specific process at the timing (at the time of the first stop ON operation). The gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3.

According to the above configuration, by generating the notification corresponding to the specific process based on the second result at the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the result can be grasped from the notification. However, if the first result can be predicted, the selection of the operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode is correct when the notification is performed, and the result of the specific processing is preferable for the player. It is possible to realize a novel playability such as notifying whether or not it was the case by the notification at the branch timing, and it is also possible to greatly excite the production toward the notification at a specific timing.

Feature N5. The first result is the aspect result.
The specific processing means executes the first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed or the specific process is executed as the specific process. It is set not to
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated by the first operation mode, the lottery result is specified to a specific position of the specific orbital body (left reel 32L) among the orbiting bodies. The pattern is stopped, and the first pattern combination is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (cherries A to C), the specific pattern is stopped at a specific position of the specific orbiter, and the first pattern combination and the first pattern combination are placed at the effective position. When the third pattern combination different from the pattern combination of 2 is stopped, the privilege corresponding to the second result is given by the privilege giving means.
The special notification means (display control device 81 performs a definite effect when the cherry is won) capable of executing special notification in a situation where the specific pattern is stopped at a specific position of the specific orbiting body and other orbiting bodies are not stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature N2 to the feature N4, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process for the purpose of the game.

When a specific pattern stops at a specific position of a specific orbiter, it is determined from the stop result whether it is based on the second result or the first operation mode when the first result is won. I can't. In such a configuration, since the special notification may be performed when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiter, the special notification corresponds to the specific processing based on the second result. It is not possible to determine whether it corresponds to the first specific process or the second specific process after that, and there are more options for predicting the result when the special notification is given. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the special notification.

Feature N6. The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the special notification means executes notification corresponding to the result of the specific process based on the second result as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the specific processing is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as a special notification when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiter. By doing so, if the scene where the special notification is performed is the first result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but the content of the special notification does not conflict. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the special notification.

Feature N7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the second symbol combination stops at the effective position without stopping at the specific position of the specific orbiting body. The gaming machine according to N5 or feature N6.

According to the above configuration, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning the first result, the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position of the specific orbiter, but when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the specific pattern is generated. Since it does not stop, it is possible for the special notification to give a strong impression that it was executed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. By doing so, the degree of attention to the special notification can be suitably increased.

Feature N8. The specific processing means is
A means capable of executing a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition, AT addition winning, ceiling counter subtraction) that facilitates execution of the aspect notification by the aspect notification means is provided. ,
The specific process in the case of the first result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific process in the case of the predetermined second result (for example, cherry A). The gaming machine according to any one of feature N2 to feature N7.

According to the above configuration, a specific event is more likely to occur when the specific process is performed after the operation based on the first result than when the specific process is performed before the operation based on the second result. Therefore, in the case of the game in which the second result is won, it is overwhelmingly easier to execute the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process in the game, but the specific process leading to the specific event requested by the player is the first. As a result, the winning game is easier to execute. Therefore, even if it is the first result, the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a special timing in the game in which the specific process is performed, so that even the second result, the game, is specified. It is possible to raise expectations for the notification corresponding to the processing result.

Feature N9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result (normal rips A to C, chance eyes A to C, cherries A to C, watermelon) is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature N2 to the feature N8, which is set to.

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of the first result is lower than that of the second result. Therefore, if the timing of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is adjusted to the first result side, the second result is obtained. In the case of the result, inconveniences such as not being notified easily after the specific process is executed are likely to occur. In that respect, by executing the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process at the special timing in the game regardless of the result, it is possible to confuse the fact that it is the first result with the second result, and the notification can be made. It is possible to prevent the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing from being detected from the timing, and to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the notification.

Feature N10. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
Equipped with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special combination), the start AT lottery process by the first specific processing means (for example, the main control device 101) that executes the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means. Function to execute) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, the second specific processing means (for example, the main control device) that executes the specific process before the operation of the stop operation means. Function to execute AT lottery processing at the time of stop by 101) and
Equipped with
The first specific notification means capable of executing the first specific notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. (A function to execute processing for performing doublet effect and doublet effect by the display control device 81) and
Before the specific timing in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (during the first stop ON operation), the second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by having a specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a definite effect at the time of winning a cherry by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, the first privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, while the stop operation means is given in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is given when the operation is performed in, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. Therefore, when the special result is obtained, the stop operation is performed. It is possible to make the advantage different depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the playability in which the privilege given by such an operation mode may differ, the specific process relating to the mode notification regarding the operation mode is stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. Since it is executed after the operation of the operation means, and if it is the second result, it is executed after the operation of the stop operation means. Therefore, the lottery result is associated with the execution timing of the specific process, and the lottery result is displayed. It is interesting to understand the game to be predicted and the execution timing of the specific process based on the prediction, and then to operate the stop operation means so that the result of the specific process is advantageous to the player. It is possible to realize playability.

Then, in the case of the first result, the second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at the specific timing after the operation, and in the case of the second result, the specific process is performed before the specific timing. Since the third specific notification corresponding to the result of the above is executed, it is possible to predict which result is obtained by the second specific notification or the third specific notification, and the degree of attention to each specific notification is suitably increased. At the same time, it is possible to suitably realize the playability of operating the stop operation means after predicting the result.

Each configuration limited by the features N1 to N9 may be applied individually to the above feature N10, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

Feature N11. Multiple orbiters (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A start operation means (start lever 41) in which a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
A stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) in which a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is performed, and
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. Drive control means to be executed (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means (a function of executing a medal payout process and a re-game setting process by the main control device 101) for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (one medal payout) is given by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege. A special result (special role) is set in which a second privilege (payment of eight medals), which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, is granted by the granting means.
A mode notification means (for example, a function of executing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means.
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the function of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to an instruction function such as start AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing by the main control device 101). When,
Equipped with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special combination), the start AT lottery process by the first specific processing means (for example, the main control device 101) that executes the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means. Function to execute) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, the second specific processing means (for example, the main control device) that executes the specific process before the operation of the stop operation means. Function to execute AT lottery processing at the time of stop by 101) and
Equipped with
At the special timing (during the second stop ON operation) in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the first specific notification corresponding to the specific process can be executed, and the lottery means. At the special timing (during the second stop ON operation) in the second game in which the lottery result is the second result, the first specific notification means (display control) capable of executing the first specific notification corresponding to the specific process. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a process for generating a tempai effect by the device 81).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery of the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery is performed. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine to which a privilege corresponding to the result of the above is given, the first privilege is given when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, while the stop operation means is given in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is given when the operation is performed in, and the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. Therefore, when the special result is obtained, the stop operation is performed. It is possible to make the advantage different depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in the playability in which the privilege given by such an operation mode may differ, the specific process relating to the mode notification regarding the operation mode is stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. Since it is executed after the operation of the operation means, and if it is the second result, it is executed after the operation of the stop operation means. Therefore, the lottery result is associated with the execution timing of the specific process, and the lottery result is displayed. It is interesting to understand the game to be predicted and the execution timing of the specific process based on the prediction, and then to operate the stop operation means so that the result of the specific process is advantageous to the player. It is possible to realize playability.

Then, depending on whether it is the first result in which the specific process is executed after the operation or the second result in which the specific process is executed before the operation, the result of the specific process is performed at a special timing in any of the resulting games. Since the first specific notification corresponding to the above may be executed, the lottery result becomes difficult to understand, and it becomes possible to further enhance the fun of the above-mentioned game playability.

Each configuration limited by the features N1 to N10 may be applied individually to the above feature N11, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

The invention described in the above features N1 to N11 states that "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or the like is known as a kind of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied. It is known that an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, a slot machine is in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started. If the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the suspension result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

For each configuration of the above features N1 to N10, the features A1 to A22, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to the feature C8, the features D1 to the feature D10, the features E1 to the feature E11, and the features F1 to the feature F8. , Feature G1 to Feature G9, Feature H1 to Feature H8, Feature I1 to Feature I12, Feature J1 to Feature J8, Feature K1 to Feature K9, Feature L1 to Feature L7, Feature M1 to Feature M12, Feature N1 to N11 It is possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature N group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature N group described in detail above. It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in the area and grants a privilege to the player when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. This is a special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc., and is provided with a throwing device that takes in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device that pays out the game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiter, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (7)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the design of each orbital body, and
A start operation means for performing a start operation for starting the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a start operation means.
A stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the orbit of each of the orbiters, and a stop operation means.
When the start operation means is operated, the start drive control for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies is executed, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control for stopping the orbit of the orbiting body corresponding to the operation is performed. The drive control means to be executed and
A lottery means for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. In addition, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result can be established, while the stop operation means is different from the first operation order. When the operations are performed in the two operation order, the order result is set so that the prize of the second result can be established, in which the privilege given by the privilege giving means is smaller than that of the first result.
An advantage determination means for executing an advantage determination that causes an advantageous event advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the lottery means is provided.
The advantageous determination means includes a transition determination means for executing a transition determination to the advantageous state, with the transition of the gaming state from the normal state to the advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event.
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result. By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win a prize for the second result or a result corresponding to the second result, which is different from the first order result among the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, it is possible to win the first result or the result corresponding to the first result, while the stop operation means is described. By operating in the first operation order, it is set so that the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be won.
A sequence notification means for executing order notification regarding the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means is provided.
In the order notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the normal state, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. While controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, if it is the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed. If it is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the third result can be established, and the first advantage determination is executed as the advantage determination by the advantage determination means. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the fourth result has more benefits given by the privilege granting means than the third result. A second advantageous determination is executed or the advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means, which makes it possible to establish a prize and is less likely to produce an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than the first advantageous determination. Is set to a special result that is not executed,
At least the operation of the stop operation means according to the first operation order is included in the second operation mode.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the specific order notification means capable of executing the order notification corresponding to the first operation order by the predetermined notification means is provided. A game machine. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given to the effective position. When the pattern combination of 4 is stopped, the privilege corresponding to the 4th result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first pattern combination is the same as or corresponding to the fourth pattern combination. In the first order result, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result associated with the first order result can be established, while the stop operation means. By operating in the second operation order, the winning of the second result associated with the first order result can be established, and in the second order result, the stop operation means is changed to the second operation order. By operating in, the winning of the first result associated with the second order result can be established, while by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the second order result can be established. It is set so that the winning of the second result associated with the above can be established.
When the pattern combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result is stopped among the first pattern combinations corresponding to the first result at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the result is given. When the fourth pattern combination corresponding to the fourth result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the pattern combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result is the same as or corresponding to the pattern combination of the fourth pattern combination. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result is stopped at the effective position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the fourth result corresponds to the effective position. When the fourth pattern combination is stopped, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is given by the privilege giving means.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first privilege is the same privilege as the fourth privilege. The order notification mode corresponding to the first operation order executed by the order notification means triggered by the order result and the first operation sequence executed by the specific order notification means triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the notification mode of the corresponding order notification is a common notification mode. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first order result in the advantageous state, the specific information which is the information about the first operation order or the information that the lottery result is the first order result is sent to another control device. The first output means that can be output
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the second output means capable of outputting the specific information to the other control device and the second output means.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the gaming machine is provided with. The other control device includes the specific notification means for executing the specific notification corresponding to the first operation sequence by the specific notification means based on the specific information.
The specific notification means executes the specific notification in a common notification mode depending on whether the specific information is output triggered by the order result or the specific information is output triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images